117873709 GSM EDGE Repeater Manual Rev G (1)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters Product Description and User’s Manual

GSM-EDGE Repeaters

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER’S MANUAL

GSM-EDGE Repeaters Product Description and User’s Manual for off-air Repeaters

This document is valid for Firmware version 1.04 This document is valid for the repeater models: •

CSR 922 (R), CSR 924 (R)

•

CSR 1822, CSR 1824

•

CSR 1922, CSR 1924

•

CSFT 922 (R), CSFT 924 (R), CSFT 91822, CSFT 91824

•

CSFT 1822, CSFT 1824, CSFT 18922, CSFT 18924

•

CSFT 1922, CSFT 1924

Copyright © 2006 AVITEC AB All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language without the prior written permission of Avitec AB. The manufacturer has made every effort to ensure that the instructions contained in this document are adequate and free of errors and omissions. The manufacturer will, if necessary, explain issues which may not be covered by this document. The manufacturer's liability for any errors in the document is limited to the correction of errors and the aforementioned advisory services. This document has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using them. The manufacturer welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continual development and improvement of the documentation in the best way possible from the user's viewpoint. Please submit your comments to the nearest Avitec AB sales representative.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

1 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

Table of Contents 1

2

3

4

5

6

Repeater Technology ................................................................................................................ 13 1.1

Basic Features.................................................................................................................... 13

1.2

Repeater Types .................................................................................................................. 13

1.3

Repeater Applications ....................................................................................................... 17

1.4

Software Overview............................................................................................................ 20

Product Description .................................................................................................................. 21 2.1

Repeater Models................................................................................................................ 21

2.2

Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 22

2.3

Casing................................................................................................................................ 27

2.4

Connections ....................................................................................................................... 28

2.5

Power Supply and Back-up Battery................................................................................... 28

2.6

Building Blocks................................................................................................................. 29

2.7

Internal Connections.......................................................................................................... 34

2.8

Signal Paths ....................................................................................................................... 36

Monitoring and Control ........................................................................................................... 42 3.1

Software Features .............................................................................................................. 42

3.2

RF Parameters ................................................................................................................... 46

3.3

Hardware Identification..................................................................................................... 50

3.4

Alarm System .................................................................................................................... 51

3.5

Repeater Heartbeat ............................................................................................................ 62

3.6

Traffic Measurement ......................................................................................................... 64

3.7

Remote Communication.................................................................................................... 68

3.8

Upgrading Repeater Firmware .......................................................................................... 80

Installation................................................................................................................................. 81 4.1

Prepare the Site.................................................................................................................. 82

4.2

Install the Repeater ............................................................................................................ 98

4.3

Start-up the Repeater ....................................................................................................... 107

4.4

Configure the Repeater.................................................................................................... 112

4.5

Installation Checklists ..................................................................................................... 127

Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 132 5.1

General ............................................................................................................................ 132

5.2

Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................................. 132

5.3

Product Disposal.............................................................................................................. 132

Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 133 6.1

CSR 922 (R) .................................................................................................................... 133

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

2 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.2

CSR 924 (R) .................................................................................................................... 135

6.3

CSR1822 ......................................................................................................................... 137

6.4

CSR1824 ......................................................................................................................... 139

6.5

CSR1922 ......................................................................................................................... 141

6.6

CSR1924 ......................................................................................................................... 143

6.7

CSFT 922 (R) and CSFT 924 (R).................................................................................... 145

6.8

CSFT 1822 and CSFT 1824 ............................................................................................ 149

6.9

CSFT 1922 and CSFT 1924 ............................................................................................ 153

6.10 CSFT 91822 and CSFT 91824 ........................................................................................ 157 6.11 CSFT 18922 and CSFT 18924 ........................................................................................ 161

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

3 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Safety Instructions and Warnings Guarantees All antennas must be installed with lightning protection. Damage to power modules, as a result of lightning are not covered by the warranty. Switching on AC or DC power prior to the connection of antenna cables is regarded as faulty installation procedure and therefore not covered by the Avitec warranty. Caution (Valid for repeater CSFT 1922 only) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Safety to Personnel Before installing or replacing any of the equipment, the entire manual should be read and understood. The user needs to supply the appropriate AC or DC power to the repeater. Incorrect power settings can damage the repeater and may cause injury to the user. Caution Please be aware that the equipment may, during certain conditions become very warm and can cause minor injuries if handled without any protection, such as gloves.

Throughout this manual, there are "Caution" warnings. "Caution" calls attention to a procedure or practice, which, if ignored, may result in injury or damage to the system, system component or even the user. Do not perform any procedure preceded by a "Caution" until the described conditions are fully understood and met. Caution This notice calls attention to a procedure or practice that, if ignored, may result in personal injury or in damage to the system or system component. Do not perform any procedure preceded by a “Caution” until described conditions are fully understood and met.

Safety to Equipment When installing, replacing or using this product, observe all safety precautions during handling and operation. Failure to comply with the following general safety precautions and with specific precautions described elsewhere in this manual violates the safety standards of the design, manufacture, and intended use of this product. Avitec AB assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these precautions. This entire manual should be read and understood before operating or maintaining the repeater.

Electrostatic Sensitivity Observe electrostatic precautionary procedures. Caution ESD = Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Device

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

4 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Semiconductor transmitters and receivers provide highly reliable performance when operated in conformity with their intended design. However, a semiconductor may be damaged by an electrostatic discharge inadvertently imposed by careless handling. Static electricity can be conducted to the semiconductor chip from the centre pin of the RF input connector, and through the AC connector pins. When unpacking and otherwise handling the repeater, follow ESD precautionary procedures including use of grounded wrist straps, grounded workbench surfaces, and grounded floor mats.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

5 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


References EN 301 502 Harmonized EN for Global System for Mobile communications (GSM); Base station and Repeater equipment covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive (GSM 13.21 version 8.1.2. Release 1999) ETS 300 342-3 Radio Equipment and Systems (RES); Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) for European Digital Cellular Telecommunications systems. Base Station Radio and ancillary equipment and Repeaters meeting phase 2 GSM requirements. R & TTE Directive: ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4/GSM 11.26) Harmonized EN for Global System for Mobile communications (GSM); Base Station and Repeater equipment covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive ETS EN 301 489-8 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standard For Radio Equipment And Services; Part 8: Specific Conditions For GSM Base Stations ETS 300 342-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) For European Digital Cellular Telecommunications System (GSM 900 MHz and DCS 1 800 MHz); Part 3: Base Station Radio and Ancillary Equipment And Repeaters Meeting Phase 2 GSM Requirements

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

6 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Contact Information Phone

+46 8 475 47 00

Fax

+46 8 475 47 99

Email

[email protected]

Web

http://www.avitec.se

Address

Avitec AB Box 20116 S-161 02 Bromma SWEDEN

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

7 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Definitions, Abbreviations and Acronyms AEM

Avitec® Element Manager A software tool for operation and monitoring a network consisting of Avitec products.

ALC

Automatic Limit Control

Antenna

The part of a radio transmission system designed to radiate or receive electromagnetic waves

Antenna beamwidth

More properly referred to as the half-power beamwidth, this is the angle of an antenna pattern or beam over which the relative power is at or above 50% of the peak power

Antenna directivity

This is the relative gain of the main beam of an antenna pattern to a reference antenna, usually an isotropic or standard dipole

ARFCN

Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. A channel numbering scheme used to identify specific RF channels in a GSM radio system

Band

In wireless communication, band refers to a frequency or contiguous range of frequencies. Currently, wireless communication service providers use the 900 MHz, 1800 MHz and 1900 MHz bands for transmission

Base station

The central radio transmitter/receiver that maintains communications with a mobile radio equipment within a given range

BCCH

Broadcast Control Channel. A downlink point to multipoint logical channel in GSM used to send identification and organization information about common control channels and cell services

BSR

Band Selective Repeater

BTS

Base Transceiver Station, one part of a base station. A base station is composed of two parts, a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and a Base Station Controller (BSC). A base station is often referred to as BTS. The BTS is also sometimes called an RBS or Remote Base Station.

Carrier recovery

A technique for extracting the RF carrier from a modulated signal so that it can be reinserted and used to recover the modulating signal

Carrier-tointerference ratio, C/I

The ratio of power in an RF carrier to the interference power in the channel

Carrier-to-noise ratio, C/N

The ratio of power in an RF carrier to the noise power in the channel

Channel

In all Avitec documentation a channel is the same as a carrier.

Coverage area

The geographical reach of a mobile communications network or system

Coverage hole

An area within the radio coverage footprint of a wireless system in which the RF signal level is below the design threshold. Coverage holes are usually caused by physical obstructions such as buildings, foliage, hills, tunnels and indoor parking garages

CSFT

(Channel Selective) Frequency Translating Repeater

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

8 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


CSR

Channel Selective Repeater. A repeater that operates on a specified channel within the operating band of the repeater.

dB

Decibel, A technique for expressing voltage, power, gain, loss or frequency in logarithmic form against a reference.

dBi

Decibels referenced to an isotropic antenna. A technique for expressing a power gain measurement in logarithmic form using a theoretical isotropic antenna as a reference

dBm

Decibels referenced to 1 mW. A technique for expressing a power measurement in logarithmic form using 1 mW as a reference.

Dead spot

An area within the coverage area of a wireless network in which there is no coverage or transmission falls off. Dead spots are often caused by electronic interference or physical barriers such as hills, tunnels and indoor parking garages. See also coverage area.

Distributed antenna system

A type of antenna system that is distributed or remotely located away from the transmitter. Such an antenna or series of antennas can be connected via coaxial cable, leaky feeder or optical fiber link.

DL, Downlink

The transmission path from the base station down to the mobile station

EAM

External Alarm Messaging

EDGE

Enhanced Data for Global Evolution. A technology that gives GSM and TDMA similar capacity to handle services for the third generation of mobile telecom. EDGE was developed to enable the transmission of large amounts of data at a high speed of 384 kilobit per second, or more.

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility The ability of a device or system to function in its intended electromagnetic environment

ERP

Effective Radiated Power

ETSI

European Telecommunications Standard Institute. The European standardization body for telecommunications

FH

Frequency Hopping. A periodic changing of frequency or frequency set associated with transmission. A sequence of modulated pulses having a pseudorandom selection of carrier frequencies.

FSR

Frequency Shifting Repeater

GND

Ground

GSM

Global System for Mobile Communication. Originally developed as a panEuropean standard for digital mobile telephony, GSM has become the world’s most widely used mobile system. It is used on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequencies in Europe, Asia and Australia, and the 800 and 1900 MHz frequency in North America and Latin America.

Hand-over

The passing of a call signal from one base station to the next as the user moves out of range or the network software re-routes the call

ISI

Inter Symbol Interference. An interference effect where energy from prior symbols in a bit stream is present in later symbols. ISI is normally caused by filtering of the data streams

LED

Light Emitting Diode

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

9 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Link budget

A calculation involving the gain and loss factors associated with the antennas, transmitters, transmission lines and propagation environment used to determine the maximum distance at which a transmitter and receiver can successfully operate.

LMT

Local Maintenance Terminal

LNA

Low Noise Amplifier. A receive preamplifier having very low internal noise characteristics.

LO-signal

Local oscillator signal

Logical channel

A communications channel derived from a physical channel. A physical channel, i.e. RF channel, typically carries a data stream that contains several logical channels. These usually include multiple control and traffic channels.

LOS

Line of Sight. A description of an unobstructed radio path or link between the transmitting and receiving antennas of a communications system

MS

Mobile Station (e.g. mobile phone)

MTBF

Meantime Between Failures

NA

Not Applicable

NC

Not Connected

NF

Noise Figure

NMS

Network Management System

Noise figure

A figure of merit for receivers and preamplifiers representing the amount of excess noise added to the signal by the amplifier or receiving system itself. The lower the noise figure, the less excess noise is added to the signal

OFR

On Frequency Repeater

OMC

Operations and Maintenance Center. A location used to operate and maintain a wireless network

PA

Power Amplifier. A device for taking a low or intermediate-level signal and significantly boosting its power level. A power amplifier is usually the final stage of amplification in a transmitter.

PSTN

Public Switched Telephone Network, standard domestic and commercial phone service

Radio link

The equipment and transmission path (propagation channel) used to carry on communications. It includes the transmitting system, the propagation channel and receiving system

Repeater

A bi-directional Radio Frequency (RF) amplifier that can amplify and transmit a received Mobile Station (MS) signal in the MS transmit band. Simultaneously it amplifies and transmits a received Base Transceiver Station (BTS) RF signal in the BTS transmit band.

RF

Radio Frequency, 9 kHz – 300 GHz

© Avitec AB

Designation

Abbreviation

Frequencies

Very Low Frequency

VLF

9 kHz - 30 kHz

Low Frequency

LF

30 kHz - 300 kHz

A1009300 Rev G

10 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


RMC

Medium Frequency

MF

300 kHz - 3 MHz

High Frequency

HF

3 MHz - 30 MHz

Very High Frequency

VHF

30 MHz - 300 MHz

Ultra High Frequency

UHF

300 MHz - 3 GHz

Super High Frequency

SHF

3 GHz - 30 GHz

Extremely High Frequency

EHF

30 GHz - 300 GHz

Avitec® Repeater Maintenance Console Software tool to monitor and control Avitec repeaters via local or remote access

RS232

Serial interface standard

RS485

Serial Interface standard

SCPA

Single Carrier Power Amplifier

SDCCH

Slow Dedicated Control Channel. A low-speed bi-directional point-to-point control channel used to transmit service request, subscriber authentication, ciphering initiation, equipment validation and traffic channel assignment messages between the mobile and the network

Service area

The specified area over which the operator of a wireless communications network or system provides services

Signal-tointerference ratio, S/I

The ratio of power in a signal to the interference power in the channel. The term is usually applied to lower frequency signals, such as voice waveforms, but can also be used to describe the carrier wave. See also carrier-to-interference ratio.

Signal-to-noise ratio, S/N, SNR

The ratio of power in a signal to the noise power in the channel. This term is usually applied to lower frequency signals, such as voice waveforms. See also carrier-to-noise ratio

SIM card

Subscriber Identity Module Card. A small printed circuit board that must be inserted in any GSM-based mobile phone when signing on as a subscriber. It contains subscriber details, security information and memory for a personal directory of numbers. A Subscriber Identity Module is a card commonly used in a GSM phone. The card holds a microchip that stores information and encrypts voice and data transmissions, making it close to impossible to listen in on calls. The SIM card also stores data that identifies the caller to the network service provider

SMS

Short Messaging Service. A store and forward message service available on most second generation digital systems that allows short messages (up to 160 characters) to be sent to the mobile and displayed on a small screen. The control and signaling channels are normally used to deliver these messages

SMSC

Short Messaging Service Center

SW

Software

TCH

Traffic Channel. A logical channel that allows the transmission of speech or data. In most second generation systems, the traffic channel can be either full or halfrate

Transceiver

A transmitter and receiver contained in one package. A 2-way radio or cell phone is an example of a transceiver

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

11 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Transmitter

Equipment which feeds the radio signal to an antenna, for transmission. It consists of active components such as the mixer, driver and PA and passive components such as the TX filter. Taken together, these components impress a signal onto an RF carrier of the correct frequency by instantaneously adjusting its phase, frequency, or amplitude and provide enough gain to the signal to project it through the ether to its intended target

UL, Uplink

The transmission path from the mobile station up to the base station

WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing. A technology that uses optical signals on different wavelengths to increase the capacity of fiber optic networks in order to handle a number of services simultaneously

VSWR

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

12 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


1

Repeater Technology

1.1

Basic Features

A basic feature of a mobile communication system is to transmit RF signals between base stations and mobile radio equipment. If there is a blocking object such as a mountain or a building preventing the base station signal to reach the mobile equipment, a repeater can be used to extend the base station’s coverage area.

Server antenna Donor antenna

Repeater

BTS

MS

Undisturbed transmission

BTS

MS

Obstacle creating a coverage hole

In the downlink path the repeater will pick up the signal from the existing transmitter via the donor antenna (see illustration), amplify it and re-transmit it into the desired coverage area via the server antenna. In the uplink path the repeater will receive signals from mobile transmitters in the covered area and re-transmit them back to the base station. Other repeater applications are indoor coverage, tunnel coverage, coverage extension in low traffic areas and the possibility to install capacity in new locations without installing a new base station.

1.2

Repeater Types

1.2.1

Channel Selective Repeaters

Channel selective repeaters are mainly used for coverage of dead zones, shadows, in-building coverage or other areas with inadequate signal strength. The output power of a channel selective repeater is sufficient to cover an area shadowed by a building or other obstacle. In a channel selective repeater each carrier is separately filtered, amplified and retransmitted. A channel selective repeater from Avitec can have 1 to 4 channels. Server antenna Donor antenna F1

F1

F1

Repeater

BTS

© Avitec AB

MS

A1009300 Rev G

13 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


A channel selective repeater system consists of one repeater unit complemented with one antenna facing the donor BTS and another antenna directed towards the coverage area. The repeater site needs to be located where the BTS signal strength is large enough to be usable by the system. Ideally the repeater’s donor antenna should have line of sight (LOS) contact with the BTS antenna. If the signal strength is high enough, LOS may in some cases not be necessary. The signal generated by the BTS is picked up at the repeater site via the donor antenna. The repeater filters and amplifies the signal before retransmitting it at the same frequency over the server antenna. The isolation between the antennas at the repeater site has to be high in order to prevent degradation of signal quality and risk of oscillation. Ways to achieve this can be large physical separation between the antennas, usage of highly directional antennas with good front-to-interference ratio or external shielding between the antennas. Another option is to use a Frequency Translating repeater (see description below). Channel selective repeaters may have higher output power per carrier and typically have better spurious rejection than band selective repeaters. The maximum output power per carrier can be several watts.

1.2.2

Band Selective Repeaters

Band selective repeaters have the same functionality as channel selective repeaters. The difference is that band selective repeaters do not separate out specific carriers but amplify and retransmit all signals within a defined frequency band. The risk for intermodulation distortion leads in most cases to a lower output power per carrier in a band selective repeater than in a channel selective repeater.

1.2.3

Frequency Translating Repeaters

A frequency translating repeater provides output power levels comparable to a base station. The concept allows for high gain without the high antenna isolation required for channel selective repeaters. The frequency translating repeater consists of two units; one donor unit and one remote unit.

Link antennas Server antenna

F1

F4

RF Link Path

F1 Remote unit

Donor unit

Donor Cell Base Station

F4

Repeater units

The donor unit is mounted at the base station site where the signal enters the repeater via a directional coupler. In the donor unit, the signal is translated into another frequency, the link frequency, amplified and transmitted via a link antenna. At the remote site, a link antenna picks up the signal and feeds it to the remote unit. The signal is translated back into the original frequency and retransmitted over the server antenna. Only 2 guard channels are needed between the radio frequency and the link frequency. The isolation between antennas at the remote site seldom needs to be more than 75dB. This value that can be achieved with a limited antenna displacement, often as low as 3 meters. The relatively modest isolation requirement allows the use of omni-directional antennas for the service area.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

14 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Important applications for frequency translating repeaters are road coverage, rural coverage or for transferring capacity from a base station to another area.

Donor Unit There are two types of donor units – single donor (SD) and double donor (DD). A single donor (SD) unit has one input connector. The input signal from the BTS is split in two within the repeater unit. In the opposite direction – in the uplink – the signals are combined within the repeater before being sent to the BTS. A double donor (DD) unit has dual inputs. This can be used in combination with a BTS that uses air combining, and hence has a separate antenna for each TRU. A double donor unit can alternatively handle two signals from two separate BTS.

Remote Unit There are two types of remote units – internal combining (IR) and external combining (ER). In an internal combining (IR) remote unit output from the power amplifiers in the downlink is combined and filtered before being passed on to the server antenna. In the uplink the signal is separated within the remote unit. An external combining remote (ER) unit has two server antenna ports and the signal is combined in the air. Since the ER model needs no combiner the output signal and gain is 3dB higher than in the IR model.

1.2.4

Band Shifting Repeaters

Band shifting repeaters are based on the same concept as frequency translating repeaters described above. In contrast to a frequency translating repeater, which uses another frequency within the same band for the link, a band shifting repeater uses another band. For instance can a repeater operating on the 900MHz band use the 1800MHz band for the link and vice versa. Other combinations are also possible.

Link antennas

Link and server antenna on the remote site can often be combined Server antenna

Band 1

Band 2

RF Link Path

Band 1 Remote unit

Donor unit

Donor Cell Base Station

Band 2

Repeater units

By using another band for the link the isolation between antennas at the remote site becomes very low. It might in some applications even be possible to use the same antenna for both the link and the service area.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

15 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


1.2.5

Fiber Fed Repeaters

The fiber fed repeater is primarily designed for coverage of tunnels and large buildings.

Leaky feeder Tunnel

Directional coupler

HUB/ OptoBox

BTS

BTS Optic fiber

Fiber fed repeaters

A fiber fed repeater can be either channel selective or band selective. It receives the RF signals from the base station via a HUB or an OptoBox which translates the RF signal to an optical signal and sends it to the repeater via a fiber optic cable. The repeater unit can be installed up to 20 km away from the base station. Inside the tunnel leaky feeders or antennas can be used for transmission to the mobile units.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

16 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


1.3

Repeater Applications

1.3.1


1.3.1.1

Shadow Coverage and Gap Filling

When there are coverage holes caused by buildings or mountains, a channel selective repeater can be used to extend coverage into the “dead zone”. The building can sometimes be used as physical shield to create the necessary antenna isolation.

Repeater

Repeater BTS

MS

MS

The terrain is often seen as a limiting factor when striving for flawless radio coverage. The gap-filler repeaters can be used as a complement to the network of base stations.

1.3.2


1.3.2.1

Low Traffic Coverage

The example shows coverage extension in an area with low traffic by using frequency translating repeaters. A two sector BTS is extended with two frequency translating repeaters. Both donor units are mounted at the base station site and connected to the base station via directional couplers. Each repeater has a different link frequency and transmits the frequency of the opposite base station sector, thus minimizing interference or multi-path propagation problems. A normal handover is performed between the repeater coverage area and the neighboring base station coverage area. F1 F4

RF Link Paths F2 F8

Remote unit Remote unit F4

F8

F2

F1 Donor unit

Donor unit

BTS

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

17 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Since the installation of frequency translating repeaters requires moderate antenna isolation, remote site requirements are very moderate. 1.3.2.2

Highway Coverage

One two-sector BTS feeds two frequency translating repeaters, each covering an area comparable to the base station. This is a way to get maximum coverage out of the one BTS, with one connection point for transmission.

BTS

Since antenna isolation requirements are low for frequency translating repeaters, omni-directional antennas can be used at the remote sites to achieve good coverage. 1.3.2.3

“Fake site” – Moving Capacity

In this application the BTS is upgraded with an additional “sector” used for feeding a frequency translating repeater to cover an area up to 20km away from the BTS. This is an effective alternative when no transmission point is available in the area to be covered. The frequency translating repeater “moves” capacity from the base station site to the new location.

Fake Site Remote unit

Donor unit BTS

This type of installation takes full advantage of the high output power and high sensitivity of the frequency translating repeater.

1.3.3


A band shifting repeater can be used in the same way as a frequency translating repeater if the user has access to frequencies on two different bands.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

18 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


1.3.4

Fiber Fed Repeaters

1.3.4.1

Tunnel Coverage

Fiber optic fed repeaters makes it possible to cover long tunnels from one or two BTS sites nearby. The HUB unit, which translates between RF and opto signals, is placed at the BTS site and can feed up to 24 repeaters. The repeaters distribute the signal in the tunnel with antennas or radiating cables (leaky feeders). Using leaky feeders is normally the most effective way to cover a tunnel, since the signal is evenly distributed along the tunnel. Achieving good coverage in a train tunnel, for instance, using antennas can be difficult as the trains tend to block signal propagation. 1.3.4.2

Open Area Coverage

A fiber optic fed repeater can be used in combination with a HUB or an OptoBox to move the repeater away from the base station. This can in some cases be used to avoid antenna isolation problems.

Omnidirectional Antenna Directional Coupler BTS

Optical Fiber

Fiber Fed Repeater

HUB/OptoBox

In this example a HUB/OptoBox is placed at the BTS site. The RF signal is tapped from the antenna via a directional coupler, translated into an optical signal and sent to the repeater over a fiber optic link. At the repeater site a fiber fed repeater receives the signal, translates it back to RF and sends it to the antenna. This antenna can be for instance omni-directional because the distance to the BTS is no longer a problem.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

19 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


1.4

Software Overview

Avitec mainly supplies three different types of software; Repeater firmware, Repeater Maintenance Console (RMC) and Avitec Element Manager (AEM).

1.4.1

Repeater Firmware

The repeater firmware is the software inside the Control Module of the repeater. It is command line based, with simple SET and GET commands. A rich variety of commands are available to control and monitor all subsystems of the repeater from a normal VT100 terminal emulation program, such as ProComm™ or HyperTerminal™. This also means that any standard laptop is able to control a repeater without additional software installed. The repeater firmware has three main tasks: Set and configure parameters in the repeater, such as channel numbers, gain, power levels, and different report configurations Monitor and measure alarm sources, alarm parameters and repeater utilization Send reports and alarms to the repeater OMC Communication with the repeater can be performed either locally on site or remotely via a modem to the built in modem. For local communication a terminal with RS232 interface is needed. For remote communication a computer with a modem is needed as well as a serial communications program such as HyperTerminal™.

1.4.2

The Repeater Maintenance Console, RMC

RMC is an online software program with an intuitive graphical interface that simplifies control and installation of the repeater. The RMC is a graphical shell for the repeater’s Control Module. It reads commands and attributes from the repeater’s Control Module and displays them in an intuitive layout. This eliminates the need to learn commands and attributes for controlling the repeater. Login to the repeater can be made locally via the LMT port or remotely via a modem. As soon as the RMC is connected it constantly polls the repeater for parameters such as power supply levels, in and out levels, temperature, traffic, etc. The program can be installed from diskette or a CD. It is a Windows based application that runs on Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000 and Windows XP. The Repeater Maintenance Console is available for all Avitec repeaters.

1.4.3

The Avitec Element Manager, AEM

AEM is a complete operations and maintenance centre for Avitec repeater networks. The AEM takes control of the repeater once the installation at site is completed. The repeater gets integrated into the network and will be controlled by the Element Manager. During integration all repeater parameters and statuses are downloaded into a database. The database is regularly updated with all incoming alarms and reports, and will hence contain a copy of the repeater configuration so that current repeater information will be accessible without setting up communication with the repeaters. Communication between the AEM and the repeaters are message based. This means that the operator does not have to await message delivery, but will be informed when the message is delivered to the repeater. The Avitec Element Manager is a Windows™ based application that runs on Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000, Windows 2003 Server and Windows XP. For more information please refer to the separate AEM User’s Manual.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

20 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2

Product Description

2.1

Repeater Models

These repeater models are described in this manual. Channel Selective Repeaters 2 Channels

4 Channels

GSM-EDGE 900

CSR 922 (R)

CSR 924 (R)

GSM-EDGE 1800

CSR 1822

CSR 1824

GSM-EDGE 1900

CSR 1922

CSR 1924

2 Channels

4 Channels

GSM-EDGE 900

CSFT 922 (R)

CSFT 924 (R)

GSM-EDGE 1800

CSFT 1822

CSFT 1824

GSM-EDGE 1900

CSFT 1922

CSFT 1924


Frequency Translating Repeaters consist of two units: one donor unit and one remote unit. There are two versions of the donor unit – SD (single donor) and DD (double donor), and two versions of the remote unit – IR (internal combiner) and ER (external combiner).

Band Shifting Repeaters 2 Channels

4 Channels

GSM-EDGE 900/1800

CSFT 91822

CSFT 91824

GSM-EDGE 1800/900

CSFT 18922

CSFT 18924

Band Shifting Repeaters consist of two units: one donor unit and one remote unit. There are two versions of the donor unit – SD (single donor) and DD (double donor), and two versions of the remote unit – IR (internal combiner) and ER (external combiner).

All repeater models can, as an option, be designed for E-GSM. Note! The band shifting repeaters CSFT 18922/ CSFT 18924 are designed for E-GSM (on the link) by default.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

21 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.2

Characteristics

These are some of the most important characteristics of the Avitec GSM-EDGE off-air repeaters. For more detailed information please refer to section 6 Specifications.

2.2.1


CSR 922 (R) System

GSM/EDGE P-GSM900, E-GSM900 or GSM-R

Channels

2 channels

Operational bandwidth

35 MHz for E-GSM, 25 MHz for P-GSM and 4MHz for GSM-R

Output Power per carrier UL/DL

+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK + 34 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

Repeater Gain

60 – 90 dB

CSR 924 Same as CSR 922 but 4 channels and 3dB lower output power. CSR 1822 System

GSM/EDGE 1800 MHz (DCS 1800)

Channels

2 channels


75 MHz



Repeater Gain

60 - 90 dB

CSR 1824 Same as CSR 1822 but 4 channels and 3dB lower output power. CSR 1922 System

GSM/EDGE 1900 MHz (PCS 1900)

Channels

2 channels


60 MHz



Repeater Gain

60 - 90 dB

CSR 1924 Same as CSR 1922 but 4 channels and 3dB lower output power.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

22 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.2.2


CSFT 922 (R) System

GSM/EDGE P-GSM900, E-GSM900 or GSM-R

Channels

2 channels


35 MHz for E-GSM, 25 MHz for P-GSM and 4 MHz for GSM-R

Output Power

SD/DD: + 37 dBm GSM/GMSK + 34 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

Donor Unit per carrier, DL Output Power Donor Unit per carrier, UL

Output Power Remote Unit per carrier, DL

Output Power Remote Unit per carrier, UL

SD: - 10 dBm GSM/GMSK - 13 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

DD: - 7 dBm GSM/GMSK - 10 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

IR: + 40 dBm GSM/GMSK + 37 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

ER: + 43 dBm GSM/GMSK + 40 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

IR/ER: + 37 dBm GSM/GMSK + 34 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

Repeater Gain Donor Unit

SD: max 42 dB, DD: max 45dB

Repeater Gain Remote Unit, DL/UL

IR: 75 - 105 dB ER: 78 - 108 dB

CSFT 924 Same as CSFT 922 but 4 channels, 3dB lower output power in donor and remote unit and 6dB lower gain in remote unit. CSFT 1822 System


Channels

2 channels


75 MHz

Output Power




© Avitec AB





A1009300 Rev G

23 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters







IR: 75 - 105 dB ER: 78 - 108 dB

CSFT 1824 Same as CSFT 1822 but 4 channels, 3dB lower output power in donor and remote unit and 6dB lower gain in remote unit. CSFT 1922 System

GSM/EDGE 1900 MHz (PCS 1900)

Channels

2 channels


60 MHz

Output Power




Output Power





Remote Unit per carrier, UL





IR: 75 - 105 dB ER: 78 - 108 dB

CSFT 1924 Same as CSFT 1922 but 4 channels, 3dB lower output power in donor and remote unit and 6dB lower gain in remote unit.

2.2.3


CSFT 91822 (operates on 900 MHz, uses 1800 MHz for the link) System

GSM/EDGE P-GSM900 or E-GSM900

Link Frequency Range


Channels

2 channels

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

24 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters



35 MHz for E-GSM, 25 MHz for P-GSM

Output Power













IR: 75 - 105 dB ER: 78 - 108 dB

CSFT 91824 Same as CSFT 91822 but 4 channels, 3dB lower output power in donor and remote unit and 6dB lower gain in remote unit. CSFT 18922 (operates on 1800 MHz, uses 900 MHz for the link) System


Link Frequency Range

GSM/EDGE E-GSM900

Channels

2 channels


75 MHz

Output Power




Output Power





Remote Unit per carrier, UL




Repeater Gain Remote Unit,

IR: 75 - 105 dB

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

25 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


DL/UL

ER: 78 - 108 dB

CSFT 18924 Same as CSFT 18922 but 4 channels, 3dB lower output power in donor and remote unit and 6dB lower gain in remote unit.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

26 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.3

Casing

Avitec repeaters are relatively small and have low power consumption (see table below). They are housed in a die cast aluminum box which makes them light and offers good heat conduction and waterproofing. Cooling is accomplished by convection. The housing conforms to IP65 and NEMA 4 standards. Dimensions, Weight and Power Consumption 2-channel repeaters

4-channel repeaters

Dimensions

540 x 350 x 150 mm

Weight

22 kg

Power Consumption

160 - 270 W typical, depending on type

Dimensions

540 x 350 x 220 mm

Weight

33 kg

Power Consumption

200 – 340 W typical, depending on type

2-channel models consist of a box with a lid attached by hinges. 4-channel models consist of two identical boxes, attached by hinges, where one box serves as a lid.

2-channel repeater The repeaters are closed with two insex screws. As a complement the repeaters can be locked with a key.

4-channel repeater

Screws

The external connections at the bottom of the repeater can be protected with a cover which is screwed in place.

Lock

Connectors

The repeaters are designed to be mounted on a wall, on a pole or in a 19” rack. They should always be mounted in a vertical position with the connectors facing downwards.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

27 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.4

Connections

All connections are placed at the bottom of the repeater.

Power

Donor antenna

Ground

Server antenna

External alarms

2-channel CSR repeater

2-channel CSFT repeater, frequency translating or band shifting repeater

Power

Power

Directional Ground coupler

Link antenna

Ground

Link antenna

Server antenna 2

External alarms

Server External antenna 1 alarms

Donor unit, single donor

2-channel CSFT repeater, frequency translating or band shifting repeater Remote unit, external combiner

Antenna connections are DIN 7/16” connectors, female Connector to the directional coupler (donor unit in frequency translating or band shifting repeaters) is Ntype, female Plinth connection for power is described in 4.2.7 Supply Power to the Repeater Plinth connection for external alarms is described in 4.2.7 Supply Power to the Repeater

2.5

Power Supply and Back-up Battery

The repeater can be fed by 110/230 V AC, 50/60 Hz or -48 V DC (to be specified on order). The input is equipped with a surge, EMI, EMC suppression filter.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

28 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Power Supply There is a back-up battery. In the event of a power disruption this battery will supply the modem and the Control Module with power during enough time for the repeater to send out an alarm. The battery can be separately switched off. For more information see 2.6.5 PSUP, Power Supply.

2.6

Building Blocks

EAIM

Ref gen

PSUP

Control Module

FDM

LIMPA

Power

FDM

FDM

LIMPA

Antenna Connectors

External Alarms

Layout of a 2-channel repeater All repeaters are realized with the same basic modules. The illustration shows a 2-channel repeater. The FDM in the middle of the box is used in double donor units and in externally combined remote units for frequency and translating or band shifting repeaters. 4-channel repeaters are built up of two similar units linked by hinges to form one repeater box. In each part of a 4-channel repeater there is a splitter/combiner to distribute the signals between the LIMPAs. See also 2.7 Internal Connections.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

29 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.6.1

LIMPA, Leveling Intermediate frequency Module with Power Amplifier

The module named LIMPA, Leveling Intermediate frequency Module with Power Amplifier, consist of 4 main components: Power Amplifier (PA) Channelizer Synthesizer Microcontroller for communications with the Control Module The PA is designed using linear temperature-compensated gain blocks and discrete RF-power transistors which are capable of delivering the required output power. The channelizer part consists of a down-converter with IF SAW filters, an up-converter and a post amplifier. The channelizer also contains a power level and gain control unit. The synthesizer feeds the up and down conversion mixers in the channelizer. The reference frequency for the synthesizer is generated externally in the Reference Generator. The synthesizer generates two LO 1-signals used in the down- and up-conversion process. In conventional repeaters, the LO-signals have the same frequency, but for frequency translating repeaters, the LO-signals will be set on different frequencies. The synthesizer can be set with an increment of 200 kHz in accordance with GSM/EDGE channel spacing.

2.6.2

FDM, Filtering and Distribution Module

The module named FDM, Filtering and Distribution Module, consists of several parts: LNA, Low Noise Amplifier Splitter that divides the signal in two parts Combiner with high power capability that combines two signals into one Duplex filter for separation of the up-link and down-link RF signals with the given duplex distance. The filters consist of band-pass filters that provide excellent rejection of out-ofband signals. VSWR 2 detectors to monitor reflected power level on antenna port (downlink) Microcontroller for communications with the Control Module

2.6.3

Distribution Board

The distribution board serves as a distributor for power and internal communication within the repeater.

2.6.4

Control Module

The Control Module monitors and controls the repeater. Data is collected from other modules within the repeater such as LIMPA, FDM and Power Supply utilizing a serial bus. The collected data is processed and if an error is detected the Control Module may send an alarm via Data Call or SMS using a built in wireless

1

Local oscillator

2

Voltage standing wave ratio

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

30 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


GSM modem to an Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC). The Control Module stores the latest 40 alarms in an alarm log. In addition to collecting data from all modules utilizing the internal serial bus, the controller also collects status of four external alarm inputs connected to the External Interface board. The summary status of the repeater can be indicated on a relay port, available on the external interface connector. This relay can be used to indicate to external equipment if the repeater is functioning properly. The internal serial bus utilized to retrieve the data from the various modules is master / slave based, where the Control Module is the master and all other units are slaves. The bus is based on a 4-wire RS485 multi drop bus. Communications protocol used between modules is the Avitec proprietary protocol AviNet. In case communication with a module fails, the module generates a communications alarm to the OMC. The Control Module contains a RS232 port used for local access to the repeater. Furthermore, the GSM modem can be used for remote access.

LIMPA 1 UL (2 UL Chains)

Filtering and Distribution Module DL 1

Power Supply 1 (2 and 4 Channel Rep)

LIMPA 2 UL (4 Ch. rep) (2 UL Chains) Power Supply 2 (4 Channel Rep)

External Alarm Interface

Reference Generator

Filtering and Distribution Module DL 2 (ER only)

Serial Bus Control Module LIMPA 1 DL ( 2 DL Chains) GSM modem

LIMPA 2 DL (4 Ch. rep) (2 DL Chains)

General repeater block diagram (from a controller perspective) On regular intervals, the Control Module sends a heartbeat message to the OMC to confirm that the repeater is operational, and that the communications path between the repeater and the OMC is operational. The Control Module collects statistics on how many timeslots are utilized in the uplink path of the repeater. Once per day, a traffic report is sent to the OMC regarding the utilization of the repeater. This is used to get an estimate on how much traffic is generated from the repeater coverage area. The Control Module includes a Real Time Clock (RTC). The RTC keeps track of at what time alarms and events occur. This RTC has its own backup battery in order to keep up proper time keeping even during long power failures. The power supply unit contains a battery, which is used to backup the Control Module. In case of a power failure, the controller and built in wireless modem have sufficient power to report power failure alarms to the repeater OMC.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

31 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


1

Control Module LED

2

3

On the Control Module there are 3 LEDs to indicate the status. LED 1, Green OFF

GSM Module switched OFF

Permanent ON

GSM Module Switched on, not registered on network

Slow Flash

GSM Module switched on, registered on network (approximately 1 flash per second)

Quick flash

Module switched on, registered on network, call active (approx. 3 flashes per second)

LED 2, Red OFF

Control Module switched OFF

Slow Flash

Control Module switched on, status OK (once every 10 seconds)

Quick flash

Control Module switched on, one or more errors / alarms detected (except door status)

LED 3, Blue OFF

Control Module switched OFF, or no one logged in

Slow Flash

Control Module switched on, nobody logged in locally OK (once every 10 seconds)

Quick flash

Control Module switched on, someone logged in remotely or locally

2.6.5

PSUP, Power Supply

The module named PSUP, Power Supply, is dimensioned to handle a 2-channel repeater unit. The PSUP is fed by 110/230 V AC, 50/60 Hz or -48 V DC. The PSUP generates secondary DC voltages for the repeater modules. The input is equipped with a surge, EMI, EMC suppression filter. In the PSUP there is a backup battery module. It consists of a rechargeable battery pack, charging and supervision electronics. This backup battery will provide the Control Module and wireless modem with enough capacity to send an alarm in case of input power failure. The power supply module is connected to all other electronic modules via the distribution board. The power supply has a switch which allows it to be set in “on” position or in “stand by”.

Power Supply LED The power supply has 4 LEDs to indicate the status.

Input Power

+6V

+15V

+28V

LED 1, Input Power, Green Slow flash

Power supply unit operating on AC or DC

OFF

Power supply unit not operating

LED 2, +6V, Red Slow flash (every 10 seconds)

© Avitec AB

+6V power supply operating

A1009300 Rev G

32 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Quick flash

+6V power supply not operating or operating with malfunction



Quick flash




Quick flash


2.6.6

Ref Gen, Reference Generator Module

The module named Ref Gen, Reference Generator Module consists of 4 parts: crystal oscillator, 10 power splitters, control circuitry and microcontroller for communication with Control Module. The reference generator provides a reference signal to the synthesizers in the repeater and to the microcontrollers in the LIMPAs and FDMs. Depending on repeater type, two different crystal oscillators exist: On-Frequency repeaters: TXCO, temperature compensated crystal oscillator Frequency Translating or Band Shifting repeaters: OCXO oven controlled crystal oscillator with ultra high stability

2.6.7

EAIM, External Alarm and Interface Module

Four external alarm sources can be connected to the alarm module, EAIM. These sources must generate a voltage between 12 and 24 VDC. The presence or absence of this voltage will trigger the alarm depending on how alarm thresholds have been configured in the controller software. The module can also supply +15V to external alarm sources. The maximum allowed load on this supply is 50mA. One relay contact closure is provided to reflect the status of the repeater. For operations of external alarms see 3.4.7 External Alarms.

2.6.8

Split/Combiner

In 4-channel repeaters there are four LIMPAs. The split/combiners split and distribute the signals to the extra two LIMPAs as well as combine the signals from the extra LIMPAs.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

33 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.7

Internal Connections

2.7.1


LIMPA

LIMPA

DL2 DL1

UL2 UL1

UL2 UL1

IN/OUT

FDM IN/OUT

FDM

DL2 DL1

Donor Antenna

Server Antenna

LIMPA and FDM Connections for a Channel Selective 2-channel repeater UL 3+4

DL 3+4

LIMPA

LIMPA

LIMPA

LIMPA

DL 1+2

Splitter/ Combiner

UL 1+2

FDM IN/OUT

FDM

IN/OUT

Splitter/ Combiner

UL 1+2

DL 1+2

UL 3+4

DL 3+4

Donor Antenna

Server Antenna

LIMPA and FDM Connections for a Channel Selective 4-channel repeater

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

34 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Frequency Translating or Band Shifting Repeaters

FDM

DL2 DL1

Directional Coupler

UL1

Link Antenna

UL1

FDM

DL2 DL1

LIMPA UL1

DL2

Link Antenna

FDM

FDM

DL2 DL1

UL2 UL1

UL2

UL1

FDM

FDM

DL2

Donor Antenna

Server Antenna

LIMPA and FDM connections for a 2-channel remote unit with an Internal Combiner (IR)

LIMPA

DL1

IN/OUT

UL2

UL2

UL1

LIMPA and FDM connections for a 2-channel Double Donor (DD) unit

UL2

IN/OUT

FDM

FDM

LIMPA

DL1

IN/OUT

DL2

FDM

UL2

Directional Couplers

Link Antenna

LIMPA and FDM connections for a 2-channel Single Donor (SD) unit

LIMPA

DL1

IN/OUT

UL2 UL1

DL2

IN/OUT

UL1

LIMPA

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

UL2

IN/OUT

DL2 DL1

FDM

LIMPA

LIMPA

IN/OUT

LIMPA

IN/OUT

2.7.2

DL1

Server Antennas

LIMPA and FDM connections for a 2-channel remote unit with an External Combiner (ER)

Frequency and band shifting repeaters with 4-channels have splitters mounted in the same way as the channel selective repeaters. In DD and ER type repeaters the splitter is mounded under the FDMs.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

35 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.8

Signal Paths

2.8.1

Channel Selective Repeaters LIMPA, Downlink

Channelizer DL Chain 1

~ ~ ~

Donor Antenna

S

~

~

FDM

Channelizer and amplifier, chain 2

C

D

D C

S


Power Amplifier UL

Channelizer UL Chain 1

~ ~ ~ ~ C

Combiner

S

Splitter

D

Duplex Filter

~

Ref

LIMPA, Uplink

The signal from the antenna comes in to a duplex filter that separates and filters the uplink and downlink signals. The signal is amplified in a LNA, split and fed to the channelizers – the LIMPAs. Each channelizer is configured to operate on a unique narrow frequency band. In the channelizer the signal is mixed down to an intermediate frequency (IF), and is filtered on a GSM channel basis. After filtering, the signal is mixed up to the original desired frequency and amplified. The signal is amplified in the power amplifier. It is then fed to the combiner and further on via a duplex filter to remove undesired out of band signals and intermodulated signals, to the antenna.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

36 (164)

Server Antenna

Ref FDM

Power Amplifier DL

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4-channel repeaters have the same layout as above, but the signals are split into four parallel flows.

LIMPA, Downlink 1 + 2 Channelizer DL

Power Amplifier DL

~ ~ ~ Ref

~

~

S

C


FDM

FDM Channelizer and amplifier, chain 3

S

S

LIMPA, Downlink 3 + 4

C

C D


C

C

LIMPA, Uplink 3 + 4

S

S


C

Channelizer and amplifier, chain 2 Power Amplifier UL

C

Combiner

S

Splitter

D

Duplex Filter

© Avitec AB

S

Channelizer UL

~ ~ ~ ~

~

Ref

LIMPA, Uplink 1 + 2

A1009300 Rev G

37 (164)

Server Antenna

Donor Antenna


D

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.8.2

Frequency Translating and Band Shifting Repeaters, Donor Unit LIMPA, Downlink Channelizer DL Chain 1

~ ~ ~ Ref

FDM

Power Amplifier DL

~

~

FDM


S

C D

C

S



~ ~ ~ ~

C

Combiner

S

Splitter

D

Duplex Filter

Link Antenna

Coupler connected to the BTS

D

~

Ref

LIMPA, Uplink

Single donor, 2 channel repeater This illustration above shows a single donor unit where the signal from the base station is split into each channelizer in the downlink. In a double donor unit below the base station uses air combining and hence has one antenna for each TRU which means that two signals are fed into the repeater. In the downlink the signal is mixed in the channelizer with a reference signal and transformed into another frequency – the link frequency. In the uplink the original RF frequency is restored. There is no power amplifier in the uplink. The signal is fed directly into the base station via a 30dB coupler and hence doesn’t need a high output power.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

38 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


LIMPA, Downlink FDM


~ ~ ~ Ref

~

~

Coupler connected to the BTS

D

Power Amplifier DL

FDM


C


Link Antenna

D S

D Channelizer UL Chain 1

~ ~ ~ FDM C

Combiner

S

Splitter

D

Duplex Filter

~

Ref

~

LIMPA, Uplink

Double donor, 2 channel repeater

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

39 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


2.8.3

Frequency Translating and Band Shifting Repeaters, Remote Unit LIMPA, Downlink


~ ~ ~

Link antenna

S

~

~

FDM


C

D

D C

S


Power Amplifier UL


~ ~ ~ ~ C

Combiner

S

Splitter

D

Duplex Filter

Server Antenna

Ref FDM

Power Amplifier DL

~

Ref

LIMPA, Uplink

Remote unit with internal combining, 2 channel repeater A frequency translating or band shifting repeater has a reference generator which feeds all channelizers with a reference frequency. The channelizer contains two synthesizers, one for the down conversion from the input frequency F1 to the intermediate frequency, and one for the up conversion to F2. The illustration above shows a unit with internal combining, which means that in the downlink the output of the power amplifiers are combined, filtered and sent to the antenna. In units with external combining, the output from each amplifier is filtered separately and transmitted out on one antenna port each. The output power in a –ER (external combiner) is roughly 3dB higher than in an –IR (internal combiner), since the combiner causes a 3dB loss.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

40 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


LIMPA, Downlink Channelizer DL Chain 1

~ ~ ~ Ref

~

~

D S


C


Server Antennas

Link antenna

FDM

D

Power Amplifier UL

D

Channelizer UL

~ ~ ~

C

Combiner

S

Splitter

Chain 1

~

~

D

FDM

Power Amplifier DL

Ref

FDM

LIMPA, Uplink Chain 1

Duplex Filter

Remote unit with external combining, 2 channel repeater

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

41 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3

Monitoring and Control

Avitec GSM-EDGE repeaters contain a Control Module, see 2.6.4 Control Module, which controls all parameters in the repeater, monitors alarm sources and sends reports and alarms to the AEM. The repeaters can be accessed on site through the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) port or remotely over a built in modem. When a RS232 cable is plugged in to the LMT port, there are two options for communication; terminal mode or RMC mode. Terminal mode is accessed by using a terminal emulation software, such as HyperTerminal™ or ProComm™. Settings should be ANSI or VT100 emulation, baud rate 9600, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, No parity and No flow control. A simple command language is used to control the repeater in this mode. Repeater Maintenance Console (RMC) mode allows configuration and control of the repeater via a user friendly Windows software. Note! All instructions in this chapter assumes that the repeater is controlled using the Repeater Maintenance Console, RMC. For use of the terminal mode please refer to the document GSM-EDGE Repeater Command and Attribute Summary which contains detailed description of all attributes and commands.

3.1

Software Features

This first chapter contains an overview of the repeater software features. More in-depth descriptions are to be found in the following chapters. Please also refer to the installation part of this manual for more information about repeater installation and configuration.

3.1.1

User Access Levels

Only one user at a time can be logged in to each repeater. If someone is logged in locally to a repeater it will not respond to remote access attempts until the local user has logged off or has been logged off by the system after a configurable number of minutes of inactivity. Four (4) different user accounts are available for a repeater. Two accounts have both read and write access, and two have read only access. The Avitec Element Manager has a unique username (with full read and write access). These are the default usernames and passwords. User Name

Password

Authority

USERNAM1

PASSWRD1

read/write

USERNAM2

PASSWRD2

read/write

USERNAM3

PASSWRD3

read only

USERNAM4

PASSWRD4

read only

The user names and passwords can be changed using the RMC. However, it is recommended to have a centralized password policy managed from the Avitec Element Manager.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

42 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Change Username or Password Select “Configuration” and “Communication” Make the changes

3.1.2

RF-configurations, Statuses, Alarms and Levels

The firmware controls and monitors all repeater parameters. In the event of a failure, an alarm is logged in the repeater. If the repeater is controlled by the AEM, the alarm is also transmitted to the Avitec Element Manager. The repeater can be configured to handle alarms concerning a number of different parameters. Each alarm can also be individually configured in a number of ways. All statuses and measured levels can be read online from the RMC. This includes for instance voltage levels, RF-levels and temperatures.

3.1.3

Local Alarm Log

The repeater stores the latest 40 alarms in a local alarm log. The data that is stored for each alarm is the time at which an alarm occurred and the alarm information which consists of alarm source, alarm severity, alarm attributes and in some cases an additional alarm description. If an alarm for some reason fails to be transmitted to the AEM, the repeater reads the alarm log entries and tries to retransmit the alarms a configurable number of times to the AEM or until successfully delivered to the AEM.

3.1.4

External Alarms

If the option for external alarms has been included four (4) external alarm sources can be connected to the repeater. These can be for instance fire alarms or external door sensors. These alarms operate on a voltage between 12 and 24VDC. The presence or absence of this voltage will trigger the alarm depending on how alarm thresholds have been configured. The external alarms have only two states – “ok” or “error”. The external alarms can be given individual names to help identify them in the alarm list. As for all alarm sources a delay can be set that defines how many seconds an external alarm should be in error state before an alarm is generated.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

43 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.1.5

Relay Connection

The repeater contains a relay, located on the External Alarm and Interface Module. This relay can be used to notify external monitoring equipment about malfunctions in the repeater The relay can be configured to be activated on any number of external or internal alarms (while other alarm sources leave the relay unaffected).

3.1.6

Heartbeat Reports

On regular intervals, the repeater sends a heartbeat report to the AEM to confirm that the repeater is functioning. The heartbeat message contains information about the RF-configuration and the alarm sources. It ensures that the data communication from the repeater to the AEM is working properly. The heartbeat interval can be set from 1 to 1440 minutes. Setting the heartbeat to 0 disables the transmission of heartbeats.

3.1.7

Traffic Measurements

Each uplink LIMPA contains circuitry to detect how many timeslots are active in the uplink path, i.e. detect ongoing traffic. In 15-minute intervals the total number of active timeslots in each chain is calculated and compared to the total number of timeslots. The percentage is saved in a log. Based on this information traffic reports are sent to the AEM on a configurable time of the day.

3.1.8

Modem Control

The repeater can be equipped with a GSM or a GSM-R modem built into to the Control Module, utilizing the actual GSM or GSM-R network for remote communication. The modem should be equipped with a SIM-card when the repeater is installed at site, see 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access. The Control Module is responsible for enabling the power to the modem, unlocking the SIM-card, using the configured PIN-code and making sure the modem is logged in to the network correctly. Depending on network configuration and modem usage, the modem might require different modem initialization strings to work properly. This modem initialization string is set and verified during repeater setup. At regular intervals, the Control Module polls the modem to see that the modem connection is functioning properly. To ensure that the repeater is always remotely accessible, the controller can be configured for scheduled power cycling of the modem. This means that the modem is powered off, powered on, registered to the network and put back on line.

3.1.9

Battery Backup for Control Module and Modem

The repeater contains a back-up battery, mounted in the main power supply. This battery backs up the Control Module with the built in modem. In case of a power failure, the battery contains enough energy for the repeater to dial up the repeater OMC and inform about the power supply disruption. In case the battery is not plugged in correctly, or the battery charge is too low (broken battery), an alarm is generated to the OMC.

3.1.10 SMS or Data Call for Alarms and Reports The repeater can be controlled remotely via SMS or Data Call. If the repeater is configured to send alarms via SMS, it can still communicate via Data Call. However, if the repeater is configured for Data Call, incoming SMS messages will not be registered. Please refer to 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access for details about the remote communication using Data call and SMS. Note! Avitec Element Manager does not support communication via SMS.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

44 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.1.11 Full Repeater Configuration Available The Control Module keeps track of the exact repeater type it is controlling, and its performance parameters, including maximum uplink and downlink gain, serial number of repeater, software version in Control Module, controller hardware version, as well as hardware version of all included components. Within the repeater the Control Module communicates with other devices using their serial number as an address. Serial numbers therefore have an important role in the repeater configuration.

3.1.12 Repeater Integration into AEM When the repeater has been installed at site and the remote communication has been enabled, the repeater can be integrated to the Avitec Element Manager. This is done by the operator of the AEM. After entering the telephone number to the repeater, the AEM dials up the repeater, downloads all the repeater parameters and statuses into a database. When all parameters have been downloaded, the AEM configures the repeater with the telephone number where alarms and reports should be sent, and optionally with a secondary telephone number where the repeater can dial in case connection to primary number fails. When heartbeat reports and alarms are sent from the repeater to the AEM also the latest information about the status and RF-configuration is included. This means that the AEM operator always has information about the current status in the AEM database (and do not need to call the repeater to find this out). Note! Once the repeater is integrated to the AEM, all changes to the repeater should preferably be done from the Avitec Element Manager in order to ensure that the database always contains correct information.

3.1.13 Repeater ID and Tag When the repeater is integrated into the Avitec Element Manager the repeater is assigned a repeater ID, which is a unique identifier in the repeater network. This ID is used by the AEM to keep track of the repeaters in the AEM database. The repeater Tag can be used to give the repeater a more logical name, such as the site ID or installation place. If Tag is set during site installation, this can easily be read by the AEM during AEM integration, giving the AEM operator a clear identification of the site. Refer to 4.4.2 Set Repeater Name (TAG) on how to set the repeater Tag.

3.1.14 Two separate software banks The controller contains two different program banks. The software can be executed from one bank while new software is downloaded to the other. When new software has been completely downloaded, the execution is moved over to the new program bank. The software download can be done at site, or remotely via a modem. See 3.8 Upgrading Repeater Firmware for description about how to upgrade the firmware. Note! During software download no measurements will be made in the repeater. However, the RF transmission will still be fully operational.

3.1.15 Real Time Clock The Control Module contains a battery backed-up real time clock, which will stay active even during a power failure. The real time clock is used for instance to keep track of when an alarm occurred, when to retransmit an alarm and at what time of the day to send traffic report to the AEM. If the repeater is controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, the AEM will automatically time synchronize repeaters, to ensure that the time is always set correctly in the entire repeater network.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

45 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.2

RF Parameters

3.2.1

Channel Assignments

Assigning channels to the repeater is easy using the Repeater Maintenance Console. Depending on the repeater’s configuration there are different channel assignment options. In channel selective repeaters with two or four channels only the repeated channels from the BTS need to be configured. For frequency translating repeaters also the link channels between the donor and remote unit need to be configured. If some channels in the repeater are not used, these need to be switched off (see 4.4.1 Set up RF Configuration, for details). Channels and links are configured using the standard ARFCN conventions. Note! To ensure signal quality in the coverage area, it is important that all channels and link channels are separated by two guard channels. For example, if channel 34 is used, next allowed channel or link channel is 37. Note! It is recommended that the BCCH channel is configured as chain one (1) in the repeater. It is though possible to configure the BCCH alarm monitoring to any channel.

3.2.2

Repeater Gain

Setting the gain in the repeater plays an important role in the repeater configuration. Since the gain affects the coverage area of the repeater, it is in most cases desired to have as high gain as possible. However, since incorrect gain settings might cause the repeater to oscillate, especially channel selective repeaters, it is important to configure the gain carefully. The gain is adjusted by changing the attenuation of the repeater. The attenuation can be changed in 1 dB steps. If the attenuation for example is set to 30 dB, the repeater’s gain is lowered by 30 dB from its maximum performance. Maximum gain in the repeater can be read from the Product Information menu (choose Configuration/Product). See 4.4 Configure the Repeater, for more information about gain settings.

3.2.3

Power Level

The repeater has a constant gain in both uplink and downlink paths. The gain is set by defining the attenuation as described above. The maximum output level from the repeater can also be defined. If the input signal amplified by the gain set exceeds the set output limit, an ALC (Automatic Level Control) loop is activated. This ALC ensures that the amplifier does not add distortion to the radio signal.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

46 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Output power, dBm

ALC

+43 +38 Gain: 108 dB

-70

-65

Input signal, dBm

The maximum output power level is set in this RMC window. There are fixed values to choose from. The maximum power level can be set individually for uplink and downlink of each channel. The power level can also be set to OFF, meaning that no output power is transmitted out in the chain. The power level in the downlink should be adjusted not to send radio signals too far into neighboring cells, but yet be enough to cover the service area. In the uplink a signal from a user close to the repeater should not cause a transmit of too high power into the BTS antenna. For frequency translating repeaters the signal strength of the link channel should not be set too high – just enough to reach between the donor and the remote site. In channel selective repeaters, the uplink and downlink power levels are normally set to the same value, while the values in the frequency translating repeaters depend on the link budgets for the installation. See 4.1.5 Link Budget. Note! Chains not used in the repeater must have power level set to OFF.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

47 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.2.4

Amplifier Saturation

If the output power reaches a certain limit in the repeater the ALC is activated, as described above. For alarm and RF configuration purposes there is an Amplifier Saturation indicator and alarm parameter implemented. This indicator detects problems with the system setup or environment and can also be used during repeater installation and configuration. The indicator has four levels: below optimum settings (low) working in the optimum range (ok) going into saturation (high) well into saturation (critical) When the repeater is configured the BCCH gain in the downlink should be increased until the saturation indicator reaches the optimum range. This ensures that the repeater has optimized gain settings. See 4.1.5 Link Budget.

3.2.5

Input / Output Levels

The input and output power levels to and from the repeater are constantly monitored for each chain separately. The input level is measured directly at the input of the LIMPA. The output power is measured directly before the output of the LIMPA. The measurable input power to the repeater ranges from -110 dBm to about -25 dBm. The output power level varies depending on repeater model. The dynamic range on the output power is roughly 25 dB, meaning that a repeater with a maximum output power of 37 dBm can detect output power levels down to approximately 12 dBm. If the output power level is lower than lowest detectable level, the RMC reports a dash. By using these values together with the gain settings in the repeater it is possible to monitor the functionality of the amplifier chains. A too low output power in a chain might for instance indicate some problem with the LIMPA. These measurements can also be useful during installation of the repeater, for example by monitoring the input signal level constantly while aiming antennas towards the donor unit detecting the direction for the maximum signal level. Monitoring the output level is helpful in determining how much the gain must be increased to reach maximum output power. Note! The uplink power levels will only be displayed when there is a user in the repeater coverage area generating traffic. Also, DTX (Discontinuous Transmission Mode) enabled networks will cause the mobiles to generate traffic only when the subscriber is actually talking. This will cause the uplink meters to fluctuate a lot. The same applies to the downlink channels not configured as BCCH, since RF is only transmitted in the traffic channels if a call is handled by this TRX.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

48 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.2.6

BCCH Configuration

The BCCH channel can be configured on any chain. The most common though, is to configure the BCCH on chain 1. This is also how the repeater is configured when it is delivered. The repeater monitors the BCCH output power in the downlink to ensure that the power level stays above a configurable threshold. If the level drops below the threshold, for example if an obstacle is raised between the feeding base station and the repeater, an alarm is generated. The threshold level is set in the Alarm Configuration window.

In each chain the BCCH can be configured in three different ways:

Required

the output power must be present on this chain

Either

the output power must be above the threshold on this or any of the other chains configured

Skip

the output power is not measured on this chain

By default, the repeater is configured with “Required” in chain 1, and “Skip” in the other chains. This means that if the BCCH drops in chain 1, an alarm is generated.

Examples of how to use the BCCH configuration: Two 1-channel sectors are to be transmitted through a frequency translating –ER repeater, where each sector is transmitted out via separate antennas. Both channels need to have a constant output power above the threshold. In this case both chains should be configured as ”Required”. The base station supports BCCH “fall-over”, where the BCCH will automatically switch over to TRX 2 in case the default BCCH TRX fails. Configuring the repeater as “Either” will cause the repeater to require output power on chain 1 or 2. In this case the BTS will generate an alarm, why we do not need an alarm in the repeater OMC as well.

3.2.7

Return Loss (VSWR)

The server FDM contains circuitry to measure the reflected power levels back from the connected server antenna cables. A too high level on the reflected power generates an alarm. Typical reasons for a high reflected power level can be an antenna connector being improperly tightened, a broken cable or a broken antenna. Frequency Translating and Band Shifting –ER (external combining) repeaters contain two server FDM’s, one for each server antenna, and hence two reflected power levels are measured. All other repeater types contain only one server FDM. The level for when to generate an alarm is configurable as number of dB’s difference between forward and reflected power levels. Default level is 10 dB, and normally this value should not be changed.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

49 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.3

Hardware Identification

3.3.1

Repeater Type Identification

When a login to a repeater is made using the Repeater Maintenance Console, the RMC detects the repeater type and adjusts the user interface correspondingly. The same RMC can be used for all repeater types.

3.3.2

Hardware Inventory

A repeater contains a number of different building blocks such as FDM, LIMPA, Power Supply, etc. Some of these are so called active devices meaning that they contain a micro controller used for monitoring of module parameters. Some are passive devices, for example the distribution board. The Control Module communicates with the active devices using a master/slave configuration, where the Control Module is the master and the active devices are slaves. Each active device uses its serial number as an address. A slave only replies to requests with the correct address information. During production the repeater is configured with all the serial numbers of all the devices in the system. For passive devices, the article number of the device is added. Once the system is configured, the Control Module polls all the active devices for article numbers and production information as well as software versions and statistics of the active devices. Via the RMC the full repeater inventory can be read, including statistics of the active devices. Select “Configuration“ and “Product”

List of all hardware in the repeater

Repeater TAG Repeater ID

List of all active devices

Control Module ID

RF Parameters

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

50 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.3.3

Replacing/Reconfiguring Hardware Modules

If a module needs to be changed it is important to update the repeater with the new hardware information. For active devices this is crucial to ensure communication between the new module and the Control Module. For all devices it gives an up-to date inventory of the entire network. The hardware is reconfigured by logging in to the repeater via the RMC and switching to Terminal Mode. If the change concerns an active or passive device the command syntax varies slightly. Format: HARDWARE REPLACE [Article Number]

is the serial number of the module that has been removed is the serial number of the new module

[Article Number] is used if a passive module, such as a distribution board or external interface board is changed. Example 1: HARDWARE REPLACE 2J3A 3ASA

replaces the broken module 2J3A with the new module 3ASA. Example 2: HARDWARE REPLACE 3AZC 3EEF J691001A

replaces the old module 3AZC with the new module 3EEF, with article number J691001A. If the repeater is controlled by the Avitec Element Manager a refresh of the repeater should be initiated from the AEM as soon as the hardware has been replaced and the repeater configuration has been updated. This ensures that the AEM also contains the latest hardware configuration. Note! The current hardware configuration can be displayed in terminal mode by entering the command HARDWARE without parameters.

3.4

Alarm System

The Avitec repeaters contain a number of different alarm sources, both analog and digital, to ensure that the repeater works with desired performance.

3.4.1

Alarms and End of Alarms

When the Control Module detects a failure in the repeater, an alarm is transmitted to the Avitec Element Manager, informing the operator about the error condition. When the alarm has ceased, an end of alarm is sent to the AEM, stating that the alarm source is now OK. The alarms can also be monitored via the RMC – either locally or remotely via the modem. Each alarm and end of alarm updates the AEM database with the latest status of the alarm source, ensuring that the AEM operator always has the correct repeater status in the system. To generate an alarm a number of consecutive measurements must first show an error state. To generate an end of alarm only one OK measurement is needed.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

51 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Alarm level Alarm is sent after three seconds above threshold

End of alarm is sent as soon as status is OK

Alarm threshold

Time

Alarms can be of five different severity levels Severity Level

Description

Critical

A critical error has occurred which affects the functionality of the repeater. This type of alarm requires immediate action.

Major

A major error has occurred. This type of alarm should be investigated within a short time.

Minor

A minor error has occurred. This type of alarm should be investigated, but is not urgent.

Warning

Something has occurred that does not affect the operation of the repeater but may be important to notice. For example, someone has logged on to the repeater.

Cleared

A cleared alarm. This is the end of alarm.

Note! User related alarms (as described in 3.4.6 Alarm Sources) do not send an end of alarm.

3.4.2

Alarm Acknowledgements and Retransmissions

The 40 latest alarms and end of alarms are stored in the repeater’s local alarm log. In case an alarm is not acknowledged (see below), the alarm will be retransmitted to the AEM after a configurable number of minutes. The retransmission will be repeated a configurable number of times. Default retransmit interval is 10 minutes. Default number of retries is three. Select “Configuration “ and “Reports” Number of retransmissions Repetition cycle

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

52 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Alarm log Select “Alarm Log”

Repeater Message No

Date/Time Description

Attribute/Alarm Source Severity Class Alarm acknowledged

Acknowledgement using RMC

Additional information about a selected alarm 3.4.2.1

Alarm Acknowledgement using the RMC

Each alarm can be manually acknowledged using the Repeater Maintenance Console. However, if the repeater is controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, a manual acknowledgement of the alarm means that the AEM will not be aware of the change in the repeater status. 3.4.2.2

Alarm Acknowledgement using the Avitec Element Manager

If the repeater is integrated to and controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, an alarm is considered acknowledged when the repeater has dialed the AEM, logged in to the AEM and delivered the alarm. Once delivered to the AEM, the acknowledgement of the event is taken care of locally at the AEM, why no dialback needs to be performed to acknowledge the alarms in the repeater. 3.4.2.3

Alarm Acknowledgement using SMS

If the repeater is configured to send alarms using SMS, alarm acknowledgement can be made in two different ways. the alarm is acknowledged as soon as the alarm SMS is successfully received by the Short Message Service Centre or the alarm is acknowledged by sending a special alarm acknowledgement SMS back to the repeater from the alarm destination.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

53 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Select “Configuration “ and “Reports”

Pick one alternative from the drop-down menu

All alarms transmitted from the repeater contain a message number. Acknowledgement of an alarm is done by sending an SMS to the repeater containing this message number. Note! Only the defined “Primary SMS address” can acknowledge alarms. The table below displays the format of alarm acknowledgement messages. Message field

Format

Description

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

ID of the repeater that the message is intended for

Message number

NNNNN

Message number set by originator

Command

ACT

Action command

Argument

ACK

Acknowledge action

Argument

MMMMM

Message number of the alarm message to acknowledge

The message fields are separated with blanks. For example, sending an SMS to the repeater with the text 01-42-4711 00242 ACT ACK 00023

will acknowledge alarm number 00023 from repeater 01-42-4711.

3.4.3

Alarm Repetition

As soon as the repeater detects an alarm or an end of alarm, a connection to the Avitec Element Manager is established and the alarm event is reported. Many alarm sources are configured for the error to be present during three seconds before an alarm is generated. End of alarm is triggered as soon as an OK state is detected. If an alarm should constantly toggle between OK and ERROR the communications interface might be blocked. To prevent this there is a parameter called Minimum Alarm Repetition. This parameter defines how many minutes must elapse before a new alarm can be transmitted from the same alarm source.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

54 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


An alarm is sent when the level has been above the threshold for three seconds

Level

An end of alarm is sent as soon as status is OK Three minutes have elapsed and a new alarm is transmitted

Alarm Threshold Minimum alarm repetition Time

This illustration shows an alarm source with an upper threshold, and a fluctuating level around the alarm threshold. In this example, the first alarm will be sent as indicated. The next alarm will be transmitted after three minutes, when the minimum alarm repetition period has elapsed. Select “Configuration “ and “Reports”

Minimum time between alarms

3.4.4

Relay Output

The repeater can be ordered with a relay option. The relay, located on the External Alarm and Interface Module, can be used to indicate the summary status of the repeater. Each alarm source can be configured to be affecting the relay or not, see next section. The relay is set to be open when there is no alarm and closed as an alarm occurs. If the repeater is part of an antenna distribution system in for example a tunnel, all tunnel equipment can be monitored from one central location using current loops. This means that the tunnel service engineers can independently from the Avitec Element Manager staff be informed about the repeater status. Each alarm source can be individually configured if the relay should be affected or not. Note! The relay status is not affected by the login / logout alarm parameters. For installation testing purposes, it is possible to test the open / close function of the relay. This test procedure makes sure the relay is closed for 2.5 seconds, then opens for 10 seconds, and finally closes for 2.5 seconds before going back to original state. Select “Configuration “ and “Alarm”

Click on Relay Test

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

55 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.4.5

Alarm Configuration

A number of different parameters can be configured for how the alarms are transmitted to the repeater OMC. Each alarm source can also be individually configured in a number of different ways. Select “Configuration “ and “Alarms”

Alarm

Affect relay Alarm transmission enabled Requires acknowledgement

Lower and upper thresholds

Number of faulty measures

External Alarms

Affect relay – If checked, an active alarm from the alarm source affects the relay status Enbl. – If checked, the alarm is transmitted to the repeater OMC Note! This only affects the transmission of the alarm. The alarm is still measured, and corresponding alarm status is still displayed in the repeater status screen and in the heartbeat reports transmitted to the repeater OMC. Ack. – All alarms will by default be transmitted to the repeater OMC requiring acknowledgement (the box is checked). Disabling this checkbox removes this requirement, which means that an alarm will only be transmitted once, regardless if an acknowledgement is received or not. Lower – Lower threshold, not applicable for all alarm sources. Please refer to document GSM-EDGE Repeaters Command and Attribute Summary for details on the usage of thresholds for each alarm source. Upper – Upper threshold, not applicable for all alarm sources. Please refer to document GSM-EDGE Repeaters Command and Attribute Summary for details on the usage of thresholds for each alarm source. Time – Defines how many consecutive measurements from one alarm source that should be measured as ERROR before an alarm is triggered.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

56 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Note! In most cases, all default alarm configurations can be left unchanged, except the BCCH alarm which is called “Power level downlink”. Please refer to 3.2.6 BCCH Configuration for details about the BCCH alarm configuration.

3.4.6

Alarm Sources

Temperature Related Alarms Alarm

Code

Description

Trigger

Temperature

TEM

Measures the temperature in the repeater.

Temperature too high or too low

The temperature is located on the controller board. Power Supply Temperature

PTM

Measures the temperature in the repeater’s power supply

Temperature too high or too low

Power Related Alarms Alarm

Code

Description

Trigger

Power Supply Level

PSL

Measures the input power supply level.

Level too high or too low

This is used to detect if the power supply in to the repeater is dropping too low or getting too high. Power Supply 1

PW1

Measures the +28V generated by the repeater’s power supply.


Power Supply 2

PW2

Measures the +15V generated by the repeater’s power supply.


Power Supply 3

PW3

Measures the +6.45 V generated by the repeater’s power supply


Power Supply 4

PW4

Measures the +6.45 V generated by the repeater’s power supply feeding the controller


Battery for Mobile Equipment

BAT

Measures the battery charge in the repeater’s backup battery

Charge drops below a defined threshold or is too high

User Related Alarms Alarm

Code

Description

Trigger

Valid Login to repeater

VLI

Detects a login to the repeater, either locally or via remote connection.

A successful login

User logged out from repeater

LGO

Detects a logout from the repeater.

A logout

Illegal Logins exceeded limit

ILI

Detects and counts the number of failed login attempts.

Threshold exceeded

The counter is decreased by one every hour. A threshold can be set for number of allowed

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

57 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


attempts before the login is blocked. Changes made by logged in user

CLR

Detects all changes made to repeater settings by a user logged in to the repeater.

NA

RF Related Alarms Alarm

Code

Description

Trigger

Antenna Isolation Measurements

AIM

Measures the antenna isolation.

Isolation is outside defined interval

Two channels are used, one BCCH channel, and one so called Listener channel. By default, these channels are the ones configured in chain 1 and two, but can be changed using the RMC. The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain time every day, and in case the isolation is too low, an alarm is generated.

Input Overload Downlink

IOD

Input Overload Uplink

IOU

Power Level BCCH Downlink

PDL

Detects input overload on the downlink chain.

Overload

This alarm is used to detect if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. This can for example be a base station from another operator being mounted too close to the repeater’s donor antenna. Detects input overload on the uplink chain.

Overload

This alarm is used to detect if there is other equipment within the frequency band causing the input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater’s performance. This can for example be harmonics from TV-transmitters or other strong radio signals. Measures the output power of the BCCH channel in the downlink. If the BCCH drops below the configured threshold an alarm is generated.

Output power level BCCH too low

Reasons for the BCCH dropping might be an obstacle raised between the BTS and the repeater, or a reconfiguration of the BTS where the output power is decreased. A dropped BCCH output power from the repeater will decrease the repeater’s coverage area. Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink

© Avitec AB

WRD

Monitors the reflected power level at the server antenna port (s). An alarm might be caused by a broken antenna cable, or the antenna connector not being properly tightened.

A1009300 Rev G

The difference between the transmitted and reflected power is too low

58 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Repeater Performance Related Alarms Alarm

Code

Description

Trigger

Amplifier Chain Downlink

AMD

This is a gain alarm.

Expected output power too high or too low compared to calculated output power.

Amplifier Chain Uplink

AMU

Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink

ASD

The repeater measures the input signal level in the downlink chains and compares it to expected output power with regards to attenuation in repeater. If the output power is too high or too low, something might be failing in the amplifier chain, and hence an amplifier chain alarm is triggered. This is a gain alarm. The repeater measures the input signal level in the uplink chains and compares it to expected output power with regards to the attenuation in repeater. If the output power is too high or too low, something might be failing in the amplifier chain, and hence an amplifier chain alarm is triggered. Measures saturation in the amplifier chain downlink.

Expected output power too high or too low compared to calculated output power.

Saturation enters defined level

An amplifier chain going into saturation means that the repeater input signal level and/or gain is not set correctly. An amplifier going too deep into saturation might cause the signal quality to be decreased. There are four levels: below optimum settings working in the optimum range going into saturation well into saturation Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink

ASU

Measures saturation in the amplifier chain uplink. An amplifier chain going into saturation means that the repeater input signal level and/or gain is not set correctly. An amplifier going too deep into saturation might cause the signal quality to be decreased. There are four levels:

Saturation enters defined level

below optimum settings working in the optimum range going into saturation well into saturation Synthesizer Downlink

SZD

Detects if a synthesizer in the downlink is unlocked

Synthesizer unlocked

Synthesizer Uplink

SZU

Detects if a synthesizer in the uplink is unlocked

Synthesizer unlocked

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

59 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Communication Between Controller and Active Devices

COM

Detects errors in the communication between controller and active devices

Errors in the communication

Alarm

Code

Description

Trigger

Door

DOO

Checks if the repeater’s door is open or closed

Door is open

Door Alarm

3.4.7

External Alarms

If the option for external alarms has been included, four (4) external alarm sources can be connected to the repeater. These can be for instance fire alarms or external door sensors. These alarms operate on a voltage between 12 and 24VDC. The presence or absence of this voltage will trigger the alarm depending on how the alarm thresholds have been configured. The external alarms have only two states – “ok” or “error”. As for all alarm sources a delay can be set that defines how many seconds an alarm should be in error state before an alarm is generated Alarm

Code

Description

Trigger

External Alarm 1

EX1

Monitors any alarm source, for example fire alarms or external door sensors connected to the external interface.

Error from alarm source

External Alarm 2

EX2



External Alarm 3

EX3



External Alarm 4

EX4



The external alarms can be given individual names of up to 19 characters. Select “Configuration “ and “Alarm”

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

60 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


New name for external alarm 1

To name an external alarm click on “Edit”

3.4.8

Alarm Format

Each alarm transmitted from the repeater contains a number of fields, in detail describing the event that caused the alarm. The alarm is transmitted as an ASCII text string, each field separated by a blank/white space. Using the Avitec Element Manager to control the repeater, the alarm string is delivered to the Transceiver for further processing in the AEM system. When SMS is used to control the repeater, the string is sent as clear text to the alarm address (main address). Message field

Format

Description

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

ID of the repeater causing the alarm. When monitoring the repeater using the AEM, this repeater ID is set by the AEM during the repeater installation phase. Using SMS, this repeater ID should be modified to uniquely identify the repeater in the network.

Message number

NNNNN

Message number from the repeater, increased for each message sent to this address

Message type

ALARM

Means that the message is an alarm or end of alarm (alarm cease)

Date

DDMMYY

Day, month and year when the alarm was detected

Time

HHMMSS

Hour, minute and second when the alarm was detected

Alarm Source

PW1, DOO…

Code for alarm source. Please refer to GSM-EDGE Repeater Command and Attribute Summary to obtain a detailed list of all available alarm sources in the repeater.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

61 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Severity

CC

Abbreviation for severity of the alarm. This severity varies between the different alarm sources. CR = critical MA = major MI = minor WA = warning CL = cleared When an and of alarm is sent, the severity is CL = cleared

Class

CC

Abbreviation for kind of alarm CO = communication alarm EN = environmental alarm QS = quality of service alarm PR = processing alarm EQ = equipment alarm

Status

C..C

Status for the Alarm Source generating the alarm. Please refer to document GSM-EDGE Repeater Command and Attribute Summary to obtain detailed information about the status. If for example Alarm Source is SZU (Synthesizer Uplink), status parameter format is described in the SZU attribute in the GSMEDGE Repeater Command and Attribute Summary.

Additional alarm text

CC…CC

This quoted string contains additional alarm information, such as measured levels when the alarm condition was detected.

Example: 01-01-0001 00049 ALARM 251103 132137 WRD CR QS 1 “Current return loss is 9.0 dB”

This is an alarm message from repeater 01-01-0001, indicating that the reflected level (WRD) on the antenna port is 9.0 dB.

3.5

Repeater Heartbeat

On regular intervals, the repeater sends a heartbeat report to the AEM to confirm that the repeater is functioning. When monitoring the repeater using the Avitec Element Manager, the heartbeat reports play a key role. They contain the repeater configuration and are transmitted between the repeater and the AEM on regular intervals.

3.5.1

Heartbeat Tasks

With the heartbeat reports, a number of tasks are carried out. 3.5.1.1

Ensuring Repeater to AEM Communications path

By configuring the repeater to regularly establish a connection to the AEM, the functionality of the data communications path between the repeater and the AEM is verified. This ensures that for instance the alarms will be transmitted properly. If an expected heartbeat is not received by the AEM, an alarm is generated to the AEM operator. Reasons for a heartbeat message failing to be delivered can be: No power – the repeater site might experience a power failure, and the battery backing up the controller and modem is empty

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

62 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Broken donor antenna – If the repeater antennas have been tampered with, the repeater might not get adequate signal to establish a connection to the AEM Failing BTS – If the feeding BTS for some reason goes down, the repeater will loose its network connection, and hence fail to establish a connection to the Avitec Element Manager. 3.5.1.2

AEM Database Synchronization

The Avitec Element Manager stores all repeater parameters in a database. This database is populated during the repeater integration into the AEM, when the AEM downloads all the repeater parameters. If the AEM operator wants to monitor the configuration of the repeater, the parameters can be read from the database without having to connect to the repeater. In case of an alarm, the AEM updates the database with the status of the alarm source. In case the repeater failed to deliver the alarm to the AEM, there will be a discrepancy between the repeater configuration and the configuration in the database. Furthermore, if a technician at site makes changes to the RF-configuration of the repeater, the configuration will differ from the AEM configuration. For this reason, each heartbeat report contains all the relevant RF-parameters and status of all the alarm sources in the repeater. This means that each heartbeat report will update the AEM with all status and RF parameters. Note! Once the repeater is integrated to the Avitec Element Manager, it is recommended that all reconfigurations are made from the AEM. Note! If a user logs in to the repeater making changes, as soon as the user logs out, an alarm will be transmitted to the AEM informing the operator that a change has been made. When this alarm is received, the operator can initiate repeater synchronization where all repeater parameters will be updated. 3.5.1.3

Time Synchronization

Each heartbeat message transmitted to the AEM contains a time stamp of the local time inside the repeater. Upon reception in the AEM, the time stamp is compared to the Avitec Element Manager time. If the difference between the repeater and AEM time is too big, time synchronization is initiated by the AEM, adjusting the time in the repeater. In this ways, we ensure that a repeater integrated to the Avitec Element Manager always contains the correct time information. Note! If the time is adjusted by a user logged in to the repeater, once the user logs out, a heartbeat is sent to the AEM to ensure that the time is correctly synchronized.

3.5.2

Configuring the Heartbeat

The Heartbeat is configured to be transmitted on a regular interval. As soon as the report is successfully delivered, the repeater will wait the configured interval before transmitting the report again. The interval can be set from once per minute to once every 1440 minutes (24 hours). Setting the heartbeat interval to zero disables transmission of the heartbeat reports. If the heartbeat report was not successfully transmitted, it will be retransmitted again after a configurable number of minutes. The Control Module will try a configurable number of times to transmit the report to the Avitec Element Manager / repeater OMC. Default retransmit interval is one minute, and three retries will be made to transmit the report. In this example a heartbeat is sent every 24 hours and the number of retransmits has been set to 2 with a one minute interval. Select “Configuration “ and “Reports”

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

63 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Repetition cycle Retransmissions Repetition cycle for retransmission

Note! The report retransmit interval and number of report retransmissions also applies to the traffic reports. Note! When monitoring the repeater using the Avitec Element Manager, the heartbeat interval is decided by the AEM operator as a part of the repeater to AEM integration procedure.

3.5.3

Heartbeat Format

The heartbeat report is transmitted as an ASCII text string, with a number of fields representing the RFconfiguration and status parameters, each field separated by a blank/white space. Using the Avitec Element Manager to control the repeater, the heartbeat report is delivered to the Transceiver for further processing in the AEM system. When SMS is used to control the repeater, the report is sent as clear text to the main address. Since the different EDGE-GSM repeater types contain different number of configurations and alarm parameters, the formats of the heartbeats vary between repeater types Please refer to document GSM-EDGE Repeater Command and Attribute Summary for details on the various heartbeat formats.

3.6

Traffic Measurement

Avitec repeaters constantly monitor the radio signal in the uplink path. By doing this, it is possible to detect how much traffic is generated from within the repeater’s coverage area. On a regular basis, a traffic report is transmitted to the Avitec Element Manager, allowing for traffic analysis to identify peak hours and hotspots in the radio network covered by the Avitec repeaters.

3.6.1

Traffic Measurement Procedure

The repeater software allows for real time tracing of the repeater utilization in the uplink path of the repeater.

RSSI

Each chain in the repeater/LIMPA contains an RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator), which detects the input level. By monitoring this RSSI all the active timeslots in the uplink above a configurable threshold can be detected. A counter inside the LIMPA microcontroller counts all the detected active timeslots on a chain by chain basis.

Traffic Threshold

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Timeslot

In the example above, timeslots 2, 4 and 8 are above the configured traffic threshold

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

64 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Once every 15 minutes, the controller calculates the percentage of all active timeslots being above the threshold. The result is stored in a traffic log. On a configurable time of the day, the utilization for the last 24 hours is transmitted to the repeater OMC, after which the log is cleared. The utilization is calculated as: Utilization = All detected timeslots / Total number of timeslots * 100

3.6.2

Active Intervals

The repeater calculates the utilization in the uplink for each 15 minute interval (96 intervals per day). An active interval is defined as an interval where detected number of active timeslots is above a certain threshold. By default, an interval is considered active when 8 timeslots or more are detected. This feature is useful for trouble shooting purposes in low traffic areas. If no intervals have been active during the last day or so, a suspicion might be that there is an erroneous configuration or a failing server antenna. The repeater also saves the time point for when last timeslot was detected in the uplink path of the repeater.

3.6.3

Viewing Traffic Reports from the RMC

Traffic reports can be monitored via the RMC. Select “Utilization”

Current 15 minute interval

Earlier intervals

Real time traffic

3.6.4

Interpreting Traffic Data

The traffic data should not be treated as definite facts for two major reasons: Most GSM-EDGE networks today have DTX (Discontinuous Transmission Mode) enabled. When DTX is enabled there is only transmission from the mobile station when the user is talking. This means that

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

65 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


even though there is a call going through the repeater there is no detectable traffic when the user is silent. GPRS enabled networks can use one or more timeslots, depending on network configuration, mobile type and subscriber activity. It is not possible to make definite decisions as to how many calls are going through a repeater or if a repeater site / base station is reaching its capacity limit, but gives a very good indication about trends on the site. For a non-GPRS enabled network, reaching utilizations of up to 30% of the interval at the same time as the base station indicates 100% utilization probably means that most calls are originated from within the repeater coverage area.

3.6.5

Traffic Measurement Configuration

A number of different parameters are available in order to configure the behavior of the traffic measurements and traffic reports.

Active Intervals Traffic Threshold

3.6.5.1

Active Intervals

For each 15 minute interval, all timeslots are counted. If the number of timeslots is above the active interval’s threshold, the current interval is considered as an Active Interval. This threshold is set as number of timeslots. Default value is 8 timeslots. 3.6.5.2

Traffic Threshold

A traffic threshold can be set to define on what level measured should start. The value is set in dBm. If the traffic threshold is set to -85, any signal above -85 dBm is considered as traffic originated from within the repeater’s coverage area. 3.6.5.3

Traffic Reports

The Traffic Report is configured to be transmitted on a fixed time point of the day. By default the repeater transmits the traffic data at 02.00.00 in the morning. A recommendation is to transmit the traffic data to the repeater OMC during low traffic hours, for example during night/early morning. Select “Configuration “ and “Reports”

Report Time In case the traffic report was not successfully transmitted, it will be retransmitted again after a configurable number of minutes. The controller will try a configurable number of times to transmit the report to the Avitec Element Manager / repeater OMC.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

66 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Default retransmit interval is one minute, and three retries will be made to transmit the report. (Same setting as for the heartbeat.) Note! The report retransmit interval and number of report retransmissions also applies to the heartbeat reports. Note! When monitoring the repeater using the Avitec Element Manager, the traffic report time point is decided by the AEM operator as a part of the repeater to AEM integration procedure. Note! By default, in frequency translating donor repeaters, transmission of traffic data to the AEM is disabled. Since the same traffic should be transmitted through the remote and the donor unit, disabling the traffic report eliminates redundant information in the Avitec Element Manager database.

3.6.6

Traffic Report Format

Each traffic report transmitted from the repeater describes the repeater utilization for the last 24 hours. The traffic report is transmitted as an ASCII text string, with a number of fields describing the utilization in detail, each field separated by a blank/white space. Using the Avitec Element Manager to control the repeater, the traffic report is delivered to the Transceiver for further processing in the AEM system. When SMS is used to control the repeater, the string is sent as clear text to the main address. Message field

Format

Description

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

ID of the repeater sending the traffic report. When monitoring the repeater using the AEM, this repeater ID is set by the AEM during the repeater installation phase. Using SMS, this repeater ID should be modified to uniquely identify the repeater in the network.

Message number

NNNNN

Message number from the repeater, increased for each message sent to this address

Message type

PERFO

Means that this is a traffic report

Date

DDMMYY

Day, month and year when message is generated

Time

HHMMSS

Hour, minute and second when message is generated

First Measure Date

DDMMYY

Date of the first traffic measurement

First Measure Time

HHMMSS

Time of the first traffic measurement

Utilization Data

M..M

M..M shows information about the 96 measured 15 minute intervals. M = '0' means a utilization of 0% to 2% M = '1' means a utilization of 2% to 4% ... M = '9' means a utilization of 18% to 20% M = 'A' means a utilization of 20% to 22% M = 'B' means a utilization of 22% to 24% ... ... M = 'T' means a utilization of 58% to 60% M = 'a' means a utilization of 60% to 62% M = 'b' means a utilization of 62% to 64% M = 't' means a utilization of 98% to 100% If no data is available, a dash ('-') is reported.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

67 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Example: 01-01-0323 00755 PERFO 270803 020001 260803 020000 00000001011212233468BCDCBCBDGHGKDFDEDFHJGFDCBCBA9BCBDEFGEGEFLKHEDEDA9868678654223 21210100010000

This example shows a traffic report from the repeater 01-01-0323. First measurement is done at 2 AM, 26’th of august 2003, and traffic report is transmitted 24 hours later.

3.7

Remote Communication

Avitec repeaters contain a GSM or a GSM-R modem for remote communication. There are two different ways of communication: Using data call / modem connection. Note! This requires the SIM-card in the modem to be configured with data service. Using SMS to configure the repeater with simple text messages. The Avitec Element Manager always uses data call communication with the repeater, why all repeaters being controlled by the AEM must have data service enabled on the SIM card. Configuring the repeater to send alarms and reports via SMS it is still possible to establish data calls to the repeater, as long as the SIM card is data service enabled. The repeater contains a back-up battery, mounted in the main power supply. This battery backs up the Control Module with the GSM module. In case of a power failure, the battery contains enough energy for the repeater to dial up the repeater OMC and inform about the power supply disruption. This section describes in detail how the remote communication works. For a step by step instruction on how to configure the remote communication, please refer to 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access.

3.7.1

Modem Control

Since repeaters might be installed in remote areas and be difficult to reach, it is important that the remote communication is reliable and that a repeater can be recovered from network failures or power failures. A number of features are implemented in order to maximize the remote access availability. 3.7.1.1

Tracing Modem Activity

When no one is logged in to the repeater, all activity performed between the controller and the modem is sent out via the LMT port. By connecting a cable to the LMT port and starting the RMC in Terminal Mode (or by using a terminal emulation software as described in section 1.4.1 Repeater Firmware, all controller activity can be traced. This is useful for troubleshooting the modem connection as described later. 3.7.1.2

GSM Module Initialization

After a power failure, and upon user request, the controller performs a full initialization of the GSM module. This consists of three steps: 1.

If the SIM-card in the GSM module has the PIN code enabled, the control module unlocks the PIN code. In case wrong PIN-code is configured, the controller will not try to unlock the SIM again until the PINcode is changed. This avoids the SIM card being locked by a controller repeatedly trying to unlock the SIM with the wrong PIN code.

2.

Once the SIM is unlocked, the controller waits for the SIM to log in to the GSM network. Depending on signal quality and network configuration this might take a while. The controller will wait a configurable number of seconds (default 50 seconds) for the GSM-module to login to the network. In case no network is found, a modem power cycle will be initiated.

3.

When the module is successfully logged in to the network, the controller configures the modem with the modem initialization string as configured when setting up the remote configuration. The modem initialization string is a network dependent string. The default string is suitable for most networks, but

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

68 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


some networks might require some tweaking of this string. Refer to section 3.7.5 Troubleshooting Remote Communication, for more information. 3.7.1.3

Monitoring Modem Connection

The controller constantly monitors the status of the modem connection to ensure that it is working properly, and that the modem is logged in to the GSM network. In case the modem is not registered to the network, or the controller cannot properly communicate with the modem, a power cycling of the modem is initiated, after which the modem will reinitialized. 3.7.1.4

Scheduled Modem Power Cycling

In addition to polling the modem to ensure the repeater online status, the controller can be configured to perform an automatic power cycling on a scheduled time of the day, see 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access. Power cycling the modem ensures the latest network configuration for the GSM module, such as the HLR Update Interval etc. Note! By default, the scheduled modem power cycling is disabled.

3.7.2

Local or Remote Access

The controller contains a connection manager that only allows for one connection at a time. This means that if a user is logged in to the repeater locally the modem will not answer incoming calls. If someone is logged in to the repeater over the modem or the controller is busy dialing the Avitec Element Manager to deliver alarms and reports, no local login can be performed. To deliver an alarm or a report to the OMC takes from 20 to 50 seconds depending on network and modem configuration. Hence, the time the modem is occupied reporting to the AEM is very short. The controller can only configure the modem when no user is logged in to the system. A trace of all modem initialization activities is sent out via the LMT port. This is useful when verifying and trouble shooting the remote communication.

3.7.3

Remote Communication using Data Call

When the repeater is configured to use data call for remote communication, the modem connection is used for delivering alarms and reports and for remote communication with the repeater. Chapter 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access contains step by step instruction for how to configure the repeater for communication using data call. 3.7.3.1

Avitec Element Manager Addresses

The controller can be configured with two different addresses (telephone numbers) to which alarms and reports are delivered. In case the repeater cannot deliver alarms and reports to the primary address, the next call will be made to the secondary address. A fallback functionality is available, which means that the controller falls back to the primary address after a configurable number of minutes. If this interval is set to 0, the fallback will not be performed. A user can always force the controller to fall back to the primary address. Note! When the repeater is integrated to the Avitec Element Manager system, these addresses are set by the AEM, why they need not be configured during site installation. 3.7.3.2

Verifying the Remote Communication

When the remote configuration has been set up and the user is logged out, the communication can be verified using the modem feature of the RMC and dialing the data number. The remote communication is verified as soon as a successful remote login to the repeater has been performed. However, as a first step, it is recommended to verify that the modem is initialized correctly. After configuring the modem using the RMC, make sure to initiate a power cycling of the modem. This is done from the RMC menu.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

69 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Click on the drop-down menu Actions, choose Power Cycle Modem on Logout

When the user logs out the controller power cycles the modem, after which the GSM modem is initialized and registered onto the network. The modem is now ready for remote access. In case the initialization procedure reports an error, please refer to Trouble Shooting section later in this chapter. Verify the remote communication either by having someone attempting to integrate the repeater from the Avitec Element Manager, or by dialing the repeater using the Repeater Maintenance Console. When a successful login is made, the controller redirects the output to the modem, as in this example.

Note! It is very important to dial the data number of the SIM. In case the voice number is dialed, the call is answered, but almost immediately the call will be hung up. 3.7.3.3

SIM-card Using Single Numbering Scheme

If the network is configured using Single Numbering Scheme (SNS), some special considerations apply. The Avitec repeaters are by default configured so that networks using SNS always will have calls routed to the data service in the modem. When dialing from within the network to a repeater having an SNS-configured SIM will operate normally, since the call originator informs the system that the bearer is of type DATA. However, when dialing from outside the GSM-network trying to connect to the repeater can be difficult. Depending on the interface to the roaming network or to the PSTN network if an analog modem is used, the bearer type can default to voice. If the bearer is set to voice, the data service cannot be converted to DATA, and a call setup cannot be completed. Note! This is not a repeater related problem; the solution is to verify how the external network interfaces handles the VOICE vs. DATA bearer type.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

70 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.7.4

Remote Communication using SMS

By configuring the repeater to communicate using SMS it is possible to receive reports and alarms, and to perform remote configuration of the repeater using simple SMS / text messages. 3.7.4.1

SMS Communications Overview

The SMS (Short Message Service) system in a GSM network is a point-to-point packed based messaging system, which enables mobile phones to send and receive short text messages, SMS-messages. The SMS packet can have a maximum length of 160 characters. Each message also contains information about the originator address, where the telephone numbers are referred to as MSISDN addresses.

SMS

SMS

Repeater

BTS

BTS Short Message Service Centre – SMSC

LAN/ WAN

SMS Server

When the repeater wants to send a message to a mobile phone, the message is first sent to the Short Message Service Center (SMSC). The SMSC communicates with the network to determine where the destination mobile is located, after which the message is forwarded to the destination address as shown above. If the destination mobile phone is not within coverage or turned off, the message will be stored in the SMSC. When the mobile is turned on and logs in to the network, the SMSC will send the stored message(s) to the mobile. The SMSC center will store undelivered messages for a configurable number of hours before they are discarded (normally 3-5 days). Optionally, a dedicated server having direct network (LAN/WAN) connection to the SMSC can be used as a repeater OMC. This means that messages coming to the SMSC from the repeater will be forwarded to the server. The server is assigned its own MSISDN within the network / SMSC, allowing for the same repeater configuration to work in this setup. Note! Avitec Element Manager does not support the SMSC interface or monitoring of repeaters using SMS. 3.7.4.2

Repeater Access Control using SMS

When configuring the repeater for SMS communication, a repeater access list is configured, containing up to four different telephone numbers. Alarms and reports are always sent to a dedicated address, the Primary Address. Select “Configuration” and “Communication”

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

71 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Choose SMS

Primary address

When SMS messages are sent to the repeater to read or write parameters, the repeater checks the MSISDN for the originator of the message. If the message is any of the first two telephone numbers in the access list, full access to the repeater is allowed (SET, GET and ACT messages). If the message is from any of the other numbers in the list, read-only commands (GET) are allowed. Messages from any other MSISDN than those four in the list are discarded. 3.7.4.3

Message Formats for Repeater Configuration

Configuring the repeater is done by sending SET, GET and ACT commands in the same way as when entering commands in terminal mode. For a detailed description of all available commands, refer to document GSM- EDGE Repeaters Command and Attribute Summary. Reading parameters will always return a reply, while setting parameters will not generate a reply message. If the syntax of the message is wrong, the repeater will reply with a message explaining the syntax error. Sending ACT (ACTion) messages will not return a reply, but might cause alarms or heartbeat reports to be sent, depending on action request. All messages to the repeater must start with the repeater ID. In case the repeater ID is set incorrectly, the repeater replies back with an error reply containing the correct repeater ID. All fields in the messages to and from the repeaters are separated by blanks. Maximum message length to and from the repeater is always 160 characters. Note! Please refer to separate chapters on alarm format and format on traffic and heartbeat reports.

Format on Sending Messages Message field

Format

Description

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

ID of the repeater that the message is intended for

Message number

NNNNN

Message number set by the originator

Command

GET, SET, ACT

Command type

Attribute

SSS

A three letter attribute following the GET, SET or ACT attribute

Parameters

Optional parameters.

Repeater Reply Format Message field

Format

Description

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

ID of the repeater sending the message

Message number

NNNNN

5-digit message number increased for every message sent from

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

72 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


the repeater to this address. Message Reference

MMMMM

This is a 5 digit number reference to the message number sending the message generating this reply.

Command

GET

Command type sent to the repeater, originating the message.

Attribute

SSS

Attribute sent to the repeater

Reply

Reply message.

Error Reply Format Message field

Format

Description

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

ID of the repeater sending the message

Message number

NNNNN

5-digit message number increased for every message sent from the repeater to this address.

Text

ERROR

Text field indicating that this is an error message.

Message Reference

MMMMM

This is a 5-digit number reference to the message number sending the message generating this reply.

Error Type

SSS

WID = Wrong repeater ID VAL = Wrong value of parameter sent COM = Command error. Unknown command or attribute.

Error Message

A textual description of the error in the message.

Example 1: Sending 01-01-0001 00003 GET TAG

gets the site tag / name as defined during repeater installation. Reply: 01-01-0001 00017 00003 GET TAG RFID-2339

indicating that the name of this site is RFID-2339. Example 2: Sending 01-01-0001 00004 SET TAG RFID-2339-VALLEY

changes the site name to RFID-2339-VALLEY. Example 3: Sending 01-01-0001 00003 SET CHA 1 125

generates the reply 01-01-0001 00018 ERROR 281103 175900 00003 VAL Error(12): Illegal channel number, channel number is from 1 to 124.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

73 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


3.7.5

Troubleshooting Remote Communication

The Avitec Repeaters are equipped with a GSM module embedded on the Control Module of the repeater. This allows for remote communication with the repeater over the GSM network. Since many networks have their own “personality”, performing first time configuration of the remote communication sometimes requires tweaking of the modem parameters. This section describes some trouble shooting techniques if configuring the repeater for remote access fails.

Radio LinkProtocol (RLP)

Modem

Laptop RS232

BTS Interworking Function Unit (IFU)

Control module in Avitec Repeater Switch Centre

This illustration is a simplified schematic of the remote communication between a GSM module in a repeater and an analog modem. The analog modem in the computer communicates with the Interworking Function Unit (IFU), which is the GSM network analog network interface. The call is routed via the switch center over the air interface to the data call number in the SIM-card of the GSM module. The controller is responsible for establishing connections with the Avitec Element Manager, and to answer incoming calls to the repeater. As described in previous sections, the controller only accepts one login at a time, either via Local Maintenance port (LMT) or modem connection. Hence, when verifying the remote access of the repeater, it is important to log out from the repeater locally before trying to access the repeater remotely. 3.7.5.1

Modem Initialization Errors

As described in section 3.7.3.2 Verifying the Remote Communication, it is recommended to switch over to terminal mode after doing the modem configuration, to log out from the repeater and observe the output from the controller. A number of different failure messages can be identified. In this example the controller fails to initialize the modem. The most common reason for this failure is that the SIM-card is not inserted correctly, or that the SIM is broken.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

74 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


As stated in this screen dump, this failure is caused by the wrong PINcode being configured. No more attempts will be made to unlock the PIN-code until the code is reconfigured. Try configuring the correct PIN-code by logging in to the RMC again. Optionally, disable the PIN-code request on the SIM. This is easiest configured by disabling the PIN-code request of the SIM using a normal GSM phone.

This error is reported when the wrong modem initialization string is configured. Login to the RMC and verify that the correct modem initialization string is set. For details on the different modem initialization strings, please refer to the document GSM Module - AT Command Reference.

The modem failing to register on the network mainly depends on that the GSM signal detected by the modem is too low.

The signal level might be too low because of some different reasons: 1.

The GSM network is temporarily out of service.

2.

Signal from the BTS is too low (misaimed antennas or broken feeder cables).

3.

The modem cable between the Donor FDM and the modem has been tampered with.

4.

Modem broken.

Modem Cable

The modem normally needs a signal level of -105 dBm or better to successfully log in to the network. Please refer to 3.7.5.4 Common Problems, on how to read the modem signal level when logged in locally to the repeater.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

75 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL 3.7.5.2

Direct Modem Access

To allow for advanced trouble shooting of the communications, it is possible to access the modem directly via the Control Module from a laptop. LMT Port

RS232 cable

GSM Control Module Module Laptop

Log in to the repeater as usual, either with RMC, or with a terminal emulation program, such as HyperTerminal™. If using RMC. When the login is completed, select Terminal Mode, this will give access to the repeater command prompt in the same way as with HyperTerminal. When the repeater prompt is accessible, type in the command ACCESS MODEM

press . When typing ACCESS MODEM, the controller will send all the characters typed directly out the modem port. All characters replied back from the modem will directly go out the LMT port back to the computer. To abort an ACCESS MODEM session, press three ‘-‘ in a row (all three within one second) to come back to the repeater command prompt. Note! When accessing the modem port the modem might be configured with “echo off”, meaning that the characters entered will not be echoed back to the screen. In order to enable “echo”, press Enter. After that, type ATE1

(invisible), followed by Enter. The modem should then reply with OK

indicating that the echo is enabled. All characters entered will now be echoed back to the terminal program. 3.7.5.3

Manually answering incoming calls

It is possible to manually answer incoming calls without involving the repeater software at all, to verify that the remote access and the network itself works as intended. In order to verify the remote communication, make sure to have someone stand by to dial up the repeater with a terminal emulation program, for example HyperTerminal™. Go in to Direct Modem Access as described earlier. When in direct access mode, ask the person standing by to dial up the repeater. As soon as a call is received, the text RING

will repeatedly be displayed on the screen. Type the modem command ATA

press enter. This will inform the modem to answer (ATtention Answer). When the connection is established, a connect message will be displayed including the connection speed. Sometimes the information comes together with some miscellaneous information, such as error correction protocols etc. Note! Make sure the remote peer dials the Data Call number

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

76 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


As seen in the example, if the voice number is dialed instead of the data number, or if the modem contains an illegal modem initialization string, the message OK

or NO CARRIER

will be displayed almost immediately.

Try to change the modem initialization string. The modem initialization string mainly used to configure the remote communication is AT+CBST. Successful modem initialization strings used by Avitec includes (most common first): AT+CBST=7,0,1 AT+CBST=0,0,1 AT+CBST=0,0,1 AT+CBST=7,0,3

Once the modem initialization string is entered, try again to dial up the repeater. For details on the different modem initialization strings, please refer to the document GSM Module - AT command reference. If the setup is successful, the connect message will be brought up; CONNECT 9600

This means that an online connection is established to the remote peer. From now on, all characters typed on the keyboard will end up on the remote peer’s screen. Similarly, all characters typed by the remote peer will be displayed on the screen. In the example, the incoming call was successfully answered, and the remote user entered the text message.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

77 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


In order to come back to modem command mode, press +++ (three pluses) rapidly (within one second). Receiving OK

means that the modem is back in command mode. Typing ATH

followed by terminates the connection to the remote peer. The message NO CARRIER

will be displayed. 3.7.5.4

Common Problems

Problem When enabling the remote access for the repeater, the modem fails to log in to the network.

Solution Signal strength from the donor site is too low. The signal strength can be read directly from the modem. Go in to Direct Modem Access as described earlier. Use the command AT+CSQ (documented below) to read out the signal strength. In order to have good signal quality, Avitec recommends that the signal strength should be better than -95 dBm. If signal strength is lower, try to adjust the antennas to get a better signal strength from the donor.

Documentation of +CSQ command from a modem’s manual

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

78 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


In the example the reply to AT+CSQ is 0,7 meaning 7*2 dB above -113 dBm; the modem detects a signal level of -99 dBm.

Problem 1 Repeater is configured properly, and answers the incoming call, but when trying to dial the repeater using an analogue mode, no modem handshaking is heard from the dialing modem.

Problem 2 When dialing the repeater, the repeater answers the incoming call, but no connection is established, and after a while the repeater disconnects the call.

Solution to the above problems The most common cause is that the number called is the voice number of the SIM, not the data number. Therefore, make sure to dial the data number. If data call is used, the problem probably is an illegal modem initialization string. In order to change the modem string, go to the repeater command prompt. Try changing the modem initialization string and log out to let the controller reinitialize the modem. If problem remains, try a few different modem initialization strings. Avitec have been successful with the following modem initialization strings: AT+CBST=7,0,1 AT+CBST=0,0,1 AT+CBST=0,0,1 AT+CBST=7,0,3

Please refer to the modem manual for detailed description of the modem initialization strings.

Problem It is possible to call the repeater from another GSM mobile, but not from an analog modem.

Solution This problem is most likely related to the modem configuration and/or the configuration of the IFU unit. Try to decrease the communications speed and make sure that the modem error correction is supported by the IFU. Verify the IFU configuration to see if there are any known problems with the modem connections.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

79 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL Problem When dialing the repeater, or when the repeater is dialing the Element Manager, the connection is terminated before the handshaking is completed.

Solution When a repeater is answering an incoming modem call, or calling up the OMC to deliver an alarm or a report, the repeater will wait a configurable number of seconds for the call to be established. If no communication is established within this time, the call will be hung up. If this interval is set too low, the handshaking is terminated too fast. In the RMC, verify the Modem Connect Time to see that it is set to at least 30 seconds.

3.8

Upgrading Repeater Firmware

The software installed in the repeater is called firmware. Using the RMC it is possible to see what firmware is installed, install upgrades etc The firmware can be upgraded in the field while the repeater is operational. The RMC is used to upload software to the controller. Since the controller contains two separate software banks, software can be downloaded to one bank while executing from the other. Once software is successfully uploaded, the new software is executed. All repeater configurations remain unchanged when upgrading the software to a new version. Firmware Control via RMC View the currently installed firmware

1. Open the Firmware upload view in RMC.

Upload new firmware

1. Open the Firmware upload view in RMC. In the box labeled Firmware Location select the directory where your firmware files (ARF files) are located.

In the box labeled Installed Firmware information about the currently installed firmware is displayed.

2. Select the firmware to upload from the firmware list, labeled Select new firmware to upload. For each firmware available, there is information about version and compatibility with the repeater you are currently connected to. Below this list there is a box with detailed information about the selected firmware. 3. Click Start Upload. During upload a status screen displays upload progress information while you wait. The upload takes about 10 minutes with a local connection and 15 minutes over the GSM network. 4. Upload completed. 5. The user is logged out and the new firmware is initiated.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

80 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4 4.1

Installation Prepare the Site

4.1.1

Site Selection

4.1.2

Antennas

4.1.3

Antenna Isolation Test

4.1.4

Site Installation Advice

4.1.5

Link Budget

4.1.6

Engineering Considerations

4.2

Install Repeater

4.2.1

Unpack the Repeater

4.2.2

Mount the Repeater

4.2.3

Ensure Proper Grounding

4.2.4

Ensure Good EMV Protection

4.2.5

Attach Antenna Cables

4.2.6

Supply Power to the Repeater

4.2.7

Mount the Coupler

4.2.8

Connect External Alarms

4.3

Start up Repeater

4.4

Configure Repeater

4.4.1

Set up RF Configuration

4.4.2

Set Repeater Name

4.4.3

Set up Remote Access

4.4.4

Alarm Configuration

4.4.5

Heartbeat Configuration

4.4.6

AEM Report Configuration

4.5

Installation Checklists

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

81 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.1

Prepare the Site

4.1.1

Site Selection

Site selection is one of the most critical decisions affecting the overall performance of the system.

Repeater locations These are examples of common repeater locations. roofs of buildings adjacent to the affected area with the antennas mounted to the penthouse or building sides top of a hill that is obstructing the donor site’s coverage, with the antennas mounted on poles at ground level a water tower with antennas mounted at the top an existing utility pole with equipment and antennas mounted below any existing power lines a newly installed pole or tower

Important Issues There are a few important considerations to be made while choosing the best possible site for a repeater: Ensure access to commercial power (sun-panels is an option) Ensure adequate signal strength. For example: to obtain the maximum output, e.g. +37 dBm, from a channel selective repeater an input signal of approximately -53 dBm is needed into the repeater 3. To obtain the maximum output from a Frequency Translating Repeater’s remote site, e.g. +40dBm, an input signal of -65 dBm is needed. A conventional channel selective repeater must be located where the BTS signal strength is great enough to be recognized by the system. It should also be located no more than 15 km from the donor site and 5 km from the furthest area to be served. Ensure line of sight (LOS) between the BTS antenna and the repeater’s donor antenna for channel selective repeaters, and between the link antennas for frequency translating repeaters. If the signal strength is adequate, LOS may in some cases not be necessary.

4.1.2

Antennas

Select antennas for the system with the proper directivity and high front-to-interference ratio in order to optimize repeater coverage and system noise performance. Ensure adequate antenna insulation for the chosen repeater type. Link antennas typically have a narrow horizontal and vertical beam width (less than 35 degrees) and high gain (15 – 25 dBi). The narrow horizontal beam width will keep interference from the repeater link channel to a minimum. Parabolic disc antennas which offer beam widths of <10 degrees are ideal for both donor and remote link antennas. Server antennas are determined by the type of area to be covered. For a conventional repeater it can be any standard GSM base station antenna that has a good front to back ratio (>=25 dB) and between 30 and 120 degrees horizontal beam width, depending on the desired coverage area. For a frequency translating antenna it may be an omni antenna. Use compass or planning tool to get the exact direction and tilt of the antenna

3

The input signal to the antenna needs to be -71 dBm if the antenna gain is 18dBi

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

82 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL Antenna Types For server antenna purposes panel antennas are suitable for Channel Selective Repeaters and omni antennas or directional antennas for Frequency Translating Repeaters. Link antennas and pick-up antennas are often narrow beam panel antennas with high gain for Channel Selective repeaters and narrow beam antennas with gain depending on distance for Frequency Translating Repeaters

Antenna Direction Direct repeater coverage away from the donor cell to minimize RF signal coverage overlap. If the BTS has different sectors always choose to use the carriers used in the sector facing away from the remote site in order to avoid inter symbol interference (ISI).

4.1.3

Antenna Isolation Test

The antenna isolation is the difference between the output signal on the server antenna and the signal leaking into the donor or link antenna. At a conventional installation with a channel selective repeater the antenna isolation needs to be large enough not to cause any signal distortion. For EDGE-signals (8-PSK) as much as 25 dB of margin (antenna isolation – repeater gain) may be required to maintain signal quality. At the remote site of a frequency translating repeater installation the antenna isolation needs to be approximately 75dB.

Signal leaking over to the donor/link antenna Donor or link antenna Repeater

Server antenna

Local or remote connection Computer with RMC

The antenna isolation can be measured through the use of a function in the RMC. The measurement can be made at the time the repeater is configured as well as regularly when the repeater is up and running. The measurement can be made when the repeater is operational. Note! The measurement only takes a few seconds, but if the repeater is operational at the time of the measurement there is a risk of loosing calls during the time the parameters are changed. 4.1.3.1

Single Measurement

Select “RF/Status”

Prepare for the measurement

© Avitec AB

Ensure that the BCCH is in chain 1 or change the setup so that the measurement is done on the chain that contains the BCCH. Use a “silent” channel in the other chain. This channel will be used for detecting the leaking signal and needs to be free of traffic.

A1009300 Rev G

83 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


If the BCCH is not on chain 1: Select “Configuration” and “Antenna Isolation Measurement”

Define the channel that contains the BCCH and the listener channel.

Go back to “RF/Status”. Use the Actions drop down menu and select “Force Antenna Isolation Measurement”

Click on to monitor the result

4.1.3.2

Regular Measurements

The RMC can initiate regular antenna isolations measurements. Select “Configuration” and “Antenna Isolation Measurement”

Enable the measurement Define the time point

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

84 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Alternative method for antenna isolation measurement

The antenna isolation can also be measured by use of a signal generator and a spectrum analyzer. Use a signal generator to generate a carrier wave signal on the server antenna, and a spectrum analyzer to measure the signal leaking over to the donor antenna. Note! The repeater does not need to be connected.

Signal leaking over to donor antenna

Repeater

Measurement of leaking signal

Input to server antenna Signal Generator

Spectrum Analyzer

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

85 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.1.4

Site Installation Advice

4.1.4.1


In a channel selective repeater there are two antennas – one donor antenna to pick up the signal from the BTS and one server antenna to serve the coverage area. An input signal to the repeater of more than -49 dBm must be present to obtain +37 dBm output. This example illustrates the various signal levels and antenna gains needed to form a properly functioning repeater system. Received signal level

-72 dBm

Donor antenna (4 ft dish)

+25 dBi

Cable loss (100 ft of 7/8 inch)

-2 dB

Input to repeater

-49 dBm

Gain of repeater (example)

+86 dB

Output from repeater

+37 dBm


-2 dB

Server antenna gain

+13 dBi

Repeater ERP

+48 dBm

The donor antenna faces the BTS. Free line of sight is desirable but not necessary if the signal strength at the exact location of the antenna is strong enough. The server antenna may be mounted above or below the donor antenna depending on the site conditions. Important is the vertical separation needed to achieve adequate isolation between antennas. The isolation has to be at least 10-25 dB higher than the repeater gain (the higher number for EDGE). This may well be in the region of 20 meters or more. Other alternatives are metal screening with wire mesh or horizontal antenna separation. A high gain antenna will help in minimizing the overall path loss to achieve the desired output power. Donor antenna gains are typically 20 to 25 dBi, while server antennas are often 10 to 15 dBi. The server antenna normally has a horizontal beam of 60° to 120°. Donor antennas should have a horizontal and vertical beam width of less than 30° to correctly select the donor base station (instead of other nearby base stations). This table can be used as a guideline for antenna separation. Antennas are assumed to be highly directional and pointed in the opposite direction. Vertical Antenna separation

Horizontal Antenna Separation

Separation (m)

Isolation (dB)

Separation (m)

Isolation (dB)

5

75

5

45.5

10

87.1

10

51,7

20

99,1

50

65,5

30

106.2

100

71.5

40

111,2

150

75,1

50

115

250

77,6

The table demonstrates that vertical separation is much more effective.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

86 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


The physical separation between the donor and server antennas has been calculated using the following formulas. Vertical Separation: Horizontal Separation: I D λ Gd Gs

= = = = =

I (dB) = 28 + 40 log (D/λ) I (dB) = 22 + 20 log (D/λ) – (Gd – Gs)

Isolation Distance between donor and server antennas (m) Wavelength (m) Gain of donor antenna facing server antenna (dB) Gain of server antenna facing donor antenna (dB)

Site Installation Channel Selective Repeater

Donor Antenna

Recommended isolation is 10-25dB higher than the repeater gain (typically 25m)

Server Antenna

Coaxial cable diameter of ½” or more is recommended Channel Selective Repeater

7/16 type connectors, female

Site installation for channel selective repeaters 4.1.4.2


A Frequency Translating Repeater consists of two parts – a donor unit and a remote unit. The donor unit is installed at the base station site and connected to the base station through a 30 dB RF coupler. A separation of at least 2 carrier bands (600 kHz) is necessary between the link frequencies and the Broadcast Frequencies. In the illustration below the link carriers are F6 and F7 and the Broadcast Carrier Frequencies are F1 and F2 which gives more separation than is needed.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

87 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


F1 and F2

F6 and F7

Link Antenna Server Antenna

Link Antenna 16mm2 Ground Cable

F1 and F2 Repeater Remote Unit

Repeater Donor Unit

Coupler

16mm2 Ground Cable

BTS It is important to remember that a whole sector must be used when installing a Frequency Translating Repeater. The base station sector using F1 and F2 is transmitted to the repeater. The base station sector used must have the same number of carriers as the repeater. At the remote site an input signal greater than -75dBm is desired. An input of -65 dBm is necessary to deliver an output of +40dBm. This example illustrates the signal levels and antenna gains needed to form a properly functioning repeater system. Received signal level

-87 dBm

Donor antenna (4 ft dish)

+25 dBi


-2 dB

Input to repeater

-64 dBm

Gain of repeater (example)

+105 dB

Output from repeater

+41 dBm


-2 dB

Server antenna gain

+13 dBi

Repeater ERP

+52 dBm

The isolation between antennas at the remote site seldom needs to be more than 75dB. This value can be achieved with a limited antenna displacement, often as low as 3 meters. The relatively modest isolation requirement allows the use of omni-directional antennas for coverage. A high gain antenna will help in minimizing the overall path loss to achieve the desired output power. Donor antenna gains are typically 20 to 25 dBi, while server antennas are often 10 to 15 dBi. The coverage antenna normally has a horizontal beam of 60° to 120°. Donor antennas should have a horizontal and vertical beam width of less than 30° to correctly select the donor base station (instead of other nearby base stations). This table can be used as a guideline for antenna separation. Antennas are assumed to be highly directional and pointed in the opposite direction. Vertical Antenna separation

Horizontal Antenna Separation

Separation (m)

Isolation (dB)

Separation (m)

Isolation (dB)

5

75

5

45.5

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

88 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


10

87.1

10

51,7

20

99,1

50

65,5

30

106,2

100

71,5

40

111,2

150

75,1

50

115

250

77,6

The table demonstrates that vertical separation is much more effective The physical separation between the donor and server antennas has been calculated using the following formulas. Vertical Separation: Horizontal Separation: I D λ Gd Gs

= = = = =

I (dB) = 28 + 40 log (D/λ) I (dB) = 22 + 20 log (D/λ) – (Gd – Gs)

Isolation Distance between donor and server antennas (m) Wavelength (m) Gain of donor antenna facing server antenna (dB) Gain of server antenna facing donor antenna (dB)

Site Installation Frequency Translating Repeater BTS Antenna

Link Antenna

Coaxial cable diameter of ½” or more is recommended N-type connector, female

Cap Coupler

BTS

Single Donor Unit

N-type connector, female

7/16 type connector, female

Site Installation for Frequency Translating or Band Shifting Repeater – Single Donor Unit

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

89 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


BTS Antennas Link Antenna Tx/Rx 1

Tx/Rx 2 Coaxial cable diameter of ½” or more is recommended

Caps

N-type connector, female Double Donor Unit

Couplers

A double donor unit can alternatively be connected to two different BTS

N-type connectors, female

BTS


Site Installation for Frequency Translating Repeater – Double Donor Unit 4.1.4.3


A Band Shifting Repeater is identical with a frequency translating repeater; the only difference is that the link is on another band than the broadcast frequency. By using another band for the link the isolation between antennas at the remote site becomes very low. It might in some applications even be possible to use the same antenna for both the link and the service area.

4.1.5

Link Budget

It is important to make a link budget before the installation is completed. This budget will give the necessary input for tuning the system and to ensure good system performance. In this example these fixed parameters are used: BTS sensitivity (without diversity gain)

-106 dBm

BTS output Power

+41 dBm

Donor unit output power

+33 dBm

Remote unit output power

+40 dBm

4.1.5.1

Downlink Path

The Downlink path is quite straightforward to set up in a repeater installation, and also gives a good indication of the actual path loss between the donor and the remote unit. The gain in the units is simply adjusted until the desired output levels are achieved. This procedure is simplified by the built in monitoring functions in the Avitec repeaters. Remember though, that the repeater is not a piece of measurement equipment, and has a limited accuracy when presenting input and output levels. (+/-3dB and +/-2dB respectively)

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

90 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Here two different link path losses will be analyzed, representing two extremes regarding the distance between the donor and remote unit: 6.5 and 26 kilometers. Free space path loss is assumed in both cases. (Feeder losses are varied to get further extreme values).

Total Link loss (6.5km): -0.5 + 15 -108 +15 - 0.5 = - 79dB |

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

--------- Feeder loss between Remote unit and Link antenna

|

|

|

---------------- Link antenna at Remote site 15dBi

|

|

----------------------Free space path loss at 925MHz / 6.5km

|

---------------------------Link antenna at Donor site 15dBi ---------------------------------Feeder loss between Donor unit and link antenna

Total Link loss (26km): -2.5 + 15 -120 +15 - 2.5 = - 95dB |

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

-------- Feeder loss between Remote unit and Link antenna

|

|

|

----------------Link antenna at Remote site 15dBi

|

|

---------------------Free space path loss at 925MHz / 26km

|

--------------------------Link antenna at Donor site 15dBi

---------------------------------Feeder loss between Donor unit and link antenna

The downlink path based on the above link loss calculation for 6.5 and 26 kilometers.

BTS

Coupler

G=xdB

G=-30dB

P=+41dBm

© Avitec AB

Donor Unit

G=22dB

Link Path

Remote Unit

G=-79dB

P=+33dBm

G=86dB

P=-46dBm

A1009300 Rev G

P=+40dBm

91 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


BTS

Coupler

G=xdB

G=-30dB

Donor Unit

G=22dB

P=+41dBm

Link Path

Remote Unit

G=-95dB

P=+33dBm

G=102dB

P=-62dBm

P=+40dBm

Note that the shorter link distance gives the opportunity to reduce the donor downlink gain and increase the remote downlink gain. This will reduce the output power in the link antenna and minimize interference caused by the link, and thereby simplify frequency planning. The longer link distance is probably close to the maximum useful distance, since timing advance will only allow a repeater cell radius of 5-6 kilometers in this case. (The delay through the repeater chain is typically 2 x 6 us, equal to an increase of timing advance by 6-7 units) In the case of a BTS with extended range capability longer link paths are possible, but then link antennas with more gain should be considered. 20dBi antennas have been used in some installations, reducing total link loss by 10dB compared to the above numbers. Keeping everything else constant, this would allow for another 23km of link distance. 4.1.5.2

Uplink Path

The settings of the Repeater Uplink path requires much more careful planning than the Downlink. Very different results can be obtained depending on the Repeater Uplink gain setting, and there will always be a trade off situation between the Repeater cell sensitivity and BTS cell sensitivity. Low Repeater Uplink gain will result in poorer Repeater cell sensitivity but only a small BTS cell sensitivity degradation. The opposite is also true; high Repeater Uplink gain will result in good repeater cell sensitivity but a larger reduction in BTS cell sensitivity. The calculations to determine the sensitivity in the Repeater cell and the BTS cell is based on the formula for determining the total noise figure for a cascade of amplifiers and attenuators:

NF1 G1

NF2 G2

NF3 G3

NF4 G4

NFtot = NF1 + (NF2-1)/G1 + (NF3-1)/(G1*G2) + (NF4-1)/(G1*G2*G3 ) + … (units, not dB’s) This equation is basically used to find the total noise figure at two points in the cascade made up by the repeater installation. Note that if there is a device in the chain that is affected by thermal noise from an antenna, the equation has to be modified for that device. E.g. if device 3 is connected via an aerial connection, its contribution to the total gain is NF3/(G1*G2). 5.

The first point is the entire chain including the BTS receiver noise figure. This value is then directly used to calculate the repeater cell sensitivity.

6.

The second point is the same cascade excluding the BTS receiver and coupler noise figure. This noise figure is, in combination with the gain to this point, converted to an equivalent noise floor. This is then added to the BTS receiver equivalent noise floor. The sum of the noise is then converted back to a noise figure used to calculate the BTS cell sensitivity.

First the equivalent BTS noise figure corresponding to the BTS sensitivity must be calculated from the following equation:

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

92 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Eq. BTS noise figure = -106 - ( -174 + 54 + 8 ) dB = 6 dB C/N for 0.4% BER (ETSI ETR 103) 10 x log(BW) BW=251kHz (ETSI ETR 103) Thermal noise floor BTS sensitivity This value is used in all calculations below.

Example 1: Rule of thumb setup with 26km link As a starting point (”rule of thumb”) the uplink gain can be set equal to the downlink gain settings. For the -95dB link this will give the situation shown in the figure below:

Remote Unit

Link path

Donor Unit

Coupler

G=102dB NF=3dB

G=-95dB NF=95dB

G=22dB NF=5dB

G=-30dB NF=30dB

BTS

G=xdB NF=6dB NFtot=8,9dB Gtot = -1dB NFtot=4,2dB

The 8.9dB noise figure through the repeater chain corresponds to a sensitivity of

-174 + 54 + 8 + 8.9 dBm = -103.1 dBm |

|

|

|

|

|

|

----------------

|

|

---------------------

|

----------------------------

----------------------------------

Repeater chain total noise figure with BTS C/N for 0.4% BER (ETSI ETR 103) 10 x log (BW) BW = 251kHz Thermal noise floor

The noise floor from the repeater chain at the BTS receiver input is: -174 + 54 + 5.5 - 1 dBm = -115.5 dBm |

|

|

|

|

|

|

----------------

|

|

---------------------

|

----------------------------

----------------------------------

Total gain in Repeater chain Repeater chain total noise figure without BTS & coupler 10 x log (BW) BW = 251 kHz Thermal noise floor

This must now be added to the BTS receiver noise floor, which is:

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

93 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


-174 + 54 + 6 dBm = -114.0 dBm |

|

|

|

|

---------------------

|

----------------------------

----------------------------------

BTS receiver noise figure 10 x log (BW) BW = 251 kHz Thermal noise floor

And when they are added the total noise floor at the BTS receiver input becomes: 10 * LOG [10^(-115.5/10) + 10^(-114.0/10) ] = -111.7 dBm

This is a 2.3dB higher BTS receiver noise floor compared to the starting value (114-111.7=2.3), which means that the BTS receiver sensitivity has degraded from -106 dBm to -103.7dBm without diversity. Summary of example 1: The calculations in example 1 used a very simple setup technique for the uplink path. The gain in the Uplink was simply set equal to the Downlink gain in both the Donor and Remote unit. This resulted in: Sensitivity in Repeater cell = -103.1 dBm Sensitivity in BTS cell = -103.7 dBm without diversity, a reduction of 2.3dB. Note that the BTS Diversity receiver will maintain its original sensitivity of -106dBm since no Repeater noise it emitted into its input. However, the diversity gain will be lower than normal because of the Repeater noise emitted into the BTS main receiver input. Also note that all traffic through the Repeater will only enter the BTS main receiver input, NOT the diversity receiver input. This may cause a ”Diversity alarm” on some types of BTS’s. This is normal and should be a simple matter of configuring the alarms in the BTS.

Example 2: 26km link with high Repeater cell sensitivity To get good Repeater cell sensitivity, the Uplink gain must be increased compared to example 1. If the gain from the Repeater server cell antenna to the BTS receiver antenna input is positive (larger than 0 dB), the Repeater can in fact be considered to be Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA). The major difference is of course that the antenna is located 26km from the BTS in this case. The sensitivity of the original BTS cell will be degraded more than in example 1 because the noise floor will be higher at the BTS receiver input. The example 2 setup looks like the figure below: Remote Unit

Link path

G=105dB NF=3dB

G=-95dB NF=95dB

Donor Unit

Coupler

G=26dB G=-30dB NF=4.5dB NF=30dB

BTS

G=xdB NF=6dB NFtot=5.3dB Gtot = +6dB NFtot=4.2dB

Doing the calculations yields: Sensitivity in Repeater cell = -106.7 dBm Sensitivity in BTS cell = -100.2 dBm without diversity, a reduction of 5.8dB.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

94 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


It is obvious that the increased Uplink gain has improved Repeater cell sensitivity on the cost of the BTS cell sensitivity.

Example 3: 6.5km link with 2dB lower gain in the downlink compared to uplink Remote Unit

Link path

Donor Unit

Coupler

G=84dB NF=3dB

G=-79dB NF=79dB

G=22dB NF=5dB

G=-30dB NF=30dB

BTS

G=xdB NF=6dB NFtot=10.5dB Gtot = -3dB NFtot=5.2dB

Doing the calculations yields: Sensitivity in Repeater cell = -101.5 dBm Sensitivity in BTS cell

= -104.5 dBm without diversity, a reduction of 1.5dB.

This example shows a relatively small reduction in the BTS cell sensitivity on the cost of a rather poor Repeater cell sensitivity. In this case however, it is possible to increase the Uplink gain in the Remote unit and reduce it equally much in the Donor unit. This will improve the overall noise figure as dictated by the NFtot equation on page 3. This is examined in the next example.

Example 4: 6.5km link with high BTS sensitivity and optimized Repeater sensitivity The Donor Uplink gain in example 3 was 22dB. Since the minimum configurable gain in the Donor unit is 12dB, it can be reduced by 10dB. This is compensated for in the Remote unit and this setup looks like: Remote Unit

Link path

G=94dB NF=3dB

G=-79dB NF=79dB

Donor Unit

G=12dB NF=10dB

Coupler

G=-30dB NF=30dB

BTS

G=xdB NF=6dB NFtot=10.1dB Gtot = -3dB NFtot=3.7dB



Although the improvement compared to Example 3 is only a few tens of a dB, the ”cost” of the improvement is just a few moments of calculations. With more total Uplink gain the improvement is larger. See the next example.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

95 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Example 5: 6.5km link with optimized Repeater sensitivity Remote Unit

Link path

G=100dB NF=3dB

G=-79dB NF=79dB

Donor Unit

G=12dB NF=10dB

Coupler

G=-30dB NF=30dB

BTS

G=xdB NF=6dB NFtot=6.1dB Gtot = +3dB NFtot=3.2dB



Compared to example 4, the repeater sensitivity has been improved by 4dB but the BTS sensitivity has been reduced by 2dB.

Summary It has been shown by several calculation examples that some care is needed when the Uplink gain is configured in a CSFT installation if optimum sensitivity is desired. However, ”rule of thumb” setup will only cause a small BTS sensitivity degradation with a typical BTS, but Repeater cell sensitivity will not be optimum. Note that feeder looses between Repeater server antenna and Remote unit are not included in the calculations.

4.1.6

Engineering Considerations

4.1.6.1

Channel Separation

Avitec recommends a spacing of two GSM channels between the carriers in the amplifier chains. These two "guard channels" create a centre-to-centre separation of 600 kHz. Decreasing the spacing may lead to degraded performance. 4.1.6.2

Minimum Link Channel Spacing

When setting up a frequency translating repeater Avitec recommends a spacing of two GSM channels between the link frequency and the radio frequency. These two "guard channels" create a centre-to-centre separation of 600 kHz. Decreasing the spacing may lead to degraded performance. 4.1.6.3

Gain Adjustment

Use only the required power to cover blind spots or coverage areas, to minimize border overlap with the donor BTS Optimize repeater gain levels to achieve system path balance and an acceptable noise level contribution Reflections, phase fluctuations and other variables can all affect the quality of radio traffic and on site adjustments and measurement will always have to be carried out to ensure reliable radio communication.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

96 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Overlapping Coverage

Ideally, the repeater system will be engineered with minimal overlapping coverage between the donor base station and the repeater. However, the mobile unit will occasionally receive signals from both the donor and the repeater at similar levels. This situation is comparable to a mobile receiving multiple signals at varying times due to multi-path propagation. The GSM standards require that systems must accommodate up to 16μs of multi-path delay for two received signals that are less than or equal to 10dB apart. The CSR922 repeater contributes a maximum signal delay of 6μs. 4.1.6.5

Are calls possible on link frequencies for frequency translating repeaters?

Calls cannot be connected via the link frequencies for the following reasons. The mobile station (MS) searches for the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) beamed from the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) Even though the MS may find the frequency translated link signal BCCH transmission; it will not be possible to initiate a call through it. When a call is initiated, the BTS switches from BCCH to the Stand Alone Control Channel (SDCCH), which (apart from other information) instructs the MS which frequency (ARFCN) to use during the call. This makes the MS switch back to the non-frequency translated ARFCN (BTS frequency), where it will find no BTS signal and the call is aborted. The same is true when logging into the network. Note! The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCH channels are logical GSM channels, not to be confused with Absolute Radio Frequency Channels (ARFCN). Only the latter are associated with specific frequencies. 4.1.6.6

Frequency Hopping and Repeaters

Frequency hopping usually means that the input baseband traffic at frame level is switched between fixed frequency RF-channels. In order for the hopping to be effective, four or more channels are used. The Avitec channel selective repeater with appropriate number of channels can function with this kind of hopping. However, frequency hopping can also mean that the frequency of each transceiver is changed in phase with transmission frames. This is usually called synthesized hopping. Being more complex than the baseband type, it has not been widely implemented in GSM networks. When GSM is evolving into EDGE, traffic will be IP-packet based. IP-traffic studies show that frequency hopping does not improve the capacity or performance of the channel. A tendency is that frequency hopping will not be frequently used in EDGE networks.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

97 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.2

Install the Repeater

Instructions in the left column are fast track instructions and can be used by experienced users. Other users are recommended to read the complete text in this installation guide

4.2.1

Unpack the Repeater

Unpack the repeater

Inspect the shipped material before unpacking the equipment, document any visual damage and report according to routines. A delivery of a repeater from Avitec contains: Checklist with delivered items Repeater Wall mounting kit or rack mounting kit (defined in order) 4 bolts for attaching repeater to mounting kit Cable cover Keys to repeater and insex tool for bolts CD containing Product Description and User’s Manual Any other specifically ordered item

4.2.2

Mount the Repeater

Mount the repeater on a wall, on a pole or in a rack

Mount the repeater in an accessible location and in a location that fulfils the environmental requirements. The repeater can be mounted on the wall, on a pole or in a 19 inch rack. The Repeater is delivered with a wall mounting kit or a rack mounting kit. The repeater needs to be mounted tightly to eliminate vibrations

Wall mounting kit Ensure proper ventilation

Rack mounting kit

Mount the repeater so that heat can be dispersed from it. The repeater wall mounting kit ensures an optimum airflow between the wall and the repeater itself. Do not block this air channel as it will cause the MTBF of the repeater to drop dramatically, or even in the worst case cause the repeater to fail completely. If possible use a wall in the shadow to minimize the overall sun loading. If sufficient shielding cannot be obtained, an additional sun shield should be mounted.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

98 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Example of a sun shield

4.2.3 Connect the grounding protection

Ensure Proper Grounding Ensure that good grounding protection measures are taken to create a reliable repeater site. Make sure to use adequately dimensioned grounding cables. The minimum recommended conductive area for a grounding cable is 16mm2. The antenna cabling should be connected to ground every 10m by a reliable grounding kit. Make sure the grounding product used is suitable for the kind and size of cable being used. Connect the repeater box bolt to the same ground.

Ground Ground connector on repeater

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

99 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.2.4

Ensure Good EMV Protection (Lightning) Caution If insufficient Electro magnetic Protection is provided, or if EMV measures are not taken, warranties issued by Avitec are not valid.

Connect the lightning protection

The lightning hazard to electric and electronic equipment consists in the interferences of direct lightning current infections and high surge voltages induced by the electromagnetic field of nearby lightning channels or down conductors. Amplitudes from cloud-to-earth lightning amounts to several 10kA and may last longer than 2 ms. The damage caused depends on the energy involved and on the sensitivity of the electronics systems. Ensure that lightning protection measures are taken to create a reliable repeater site. Protect all coaxial cables and power cables from the transients caused by lightning. Fit all cables with suitable lightning protection devices. For detailed information please refer to IEC 61024-1 and 61312-1 for international standards for protection of information systems against LEMP, Lightning Electromagnetic Pulse, including radio transmitters. They define proper planning, installation and inspection of effective lightning protection systems. The top of the mast must be higher than the antennas and be properly grounded

The grounding path must have reliable continuity and be correctly dimensioned

Antennas

Primary Protective Devices Equipotential Grounding Bars

Secondary Protective Devices Protective Device

230V AC/48V DC

The Avitec repeaters comply with the EN standard ETS 301 498-8 which stipulates demands on lightning/surge protection for typical infrastructure telecom equipment installations. Several lightning protection devices should be used in series with declining threshold voltages to help attenuate the pulse component which makes it through the first layer of protection. The primary protective device is part of the site installation and is not supplied by

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

100 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Avitec. Coaxial lightning protection is normally one of these three types: Gas capsule, High-pass and Bandpass. There also need to be a protective device installed on the power supply cord.

Protective device installed in connection with the power supply

4.2.5

Attach Antenna Cables

Note!

For Frequency Translating Repeaters see also 4.2.6 Mount the Coupler

Note!

For site installation advice and descriptions of antenna installation see 4.1 Prepare the Site.

Attach the antenna cables to the repeater antenna connections

Connectors The connector to the directional coupler (frequency translating repeaters donor unit) is N-type female. Antenna connections are DIN 7/16” connectors, female.

Compatibility Make sure that cables and connectors are compatible. Using cables and connectors from the same manufacturer is helpful.

Connectors All connectors must be clean and dry Waterproof all outdoor connections

Waterproof all outdoor connections using silicone, vulcanizable tape or other suitable substance as moisture and dust can impair RF characteristics. Make sure enough room has been allocated for the bending radius of the cable. RF cables must not be kinked, cut or damaged in any way Connect the RF cables to the antennas tightly but without damaging threads Fasten cables tight to cable ladder or aluminum sheet

Cable Dimensions For short length of feeder cables use ½ “, for longer feeder cables use 7/8”. Chose thicker coax cables for lower attenuation. Minimize the length of the coax cables to reduce the attenuation

Jumper Cables Use jumper cables for easy installation. The RF Coaxial cable can be substituted at each end with a jumper cable.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

101 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.2.6

Mount the Coupler Caution!

When the coupler is connected the affected base station sector needs to be taken out of service. Turn the base station off before detaching the cable to the base station cell antenna. It might shut down the whole network – chose an off-peak time for this installation. Note!

The Coupler is used only in connection with Frequency Translating or Band Shifting Repeaters.

Mount the coupler

The connection between the donor unit and the BTS is made using an Avitec Coupler. The attenuation from the BTS to the repeater is -30 dB. The attenuation through the coupler from the BTS to the antenna is minimal.

Avitec Coupler The coupler is connected in series with the BTS antenna. J1 and J2 are used for the connection of the coupler in-between the BTS and the cable to the BTS antenna.

To Antenna Link Antenna

7/16 type connector N-type connector, female

Cap

RF Coaxial cable 7/16 type connector

-30dB Coupler

BTS

N-type connector, female


Coupler connections J3 or J4 is connected to the repeater donor unit depending on the orientation of the coupler. If J1 is connected to the BTS; J3 is used for connection with the repeater, if J2 is connected to the BTS; J4 is used for connection with the repeater. The connector not used (J3 or J4) must be sealed with a cap to prevent the ingression of dust and water.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

102 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


J1 and J2 are DIN 7/16 connectors, one male and one female J3 and J4 are N-type connectors, female

4.2.7

1.

Disconnect the antenna from the base station

2.

Decide whether to connect a filter in series with the antenna cable (between the coupler and the antenna) to prevent any disturbances from the repeater to reach the antenna

3.

Attach the coupler in-between the base station and the antenna cable. (J1 and J2).

4.

Attach the coupler connector closest to the base station to the repeater donor antenna connector

5.

Attach a cap to the connector closest to the antenna connection

6.

Turn the base station back on and verify that it is operational.

7.

Seal the coupler with rubber tape. Start on the base station antenna cable and wrap to the base station port cable. Wrap in a circular motion downwards. Cover the coupler and its connecting parts completely. This will provide a weather resistant seal. Complete by adding three layers of PVC tape for UV protection.

Supply Power to the Repeater Caution!

The antenna cables must be connected to the repeater before input power is switched on. Alternatively the antenna connections on the repeater can be terminated with 50ohm termination plugs. Note!

Avitec repeaters can be fed by 110/230 V AC, 50/60 Hz or 48 V DC. Ensure that the right voltage is used.

Connect the repeater to the power supply

Input power is connected to the repeater via a plinth inside the repeater. The strain relief fitting is a Pg 13.5 suitable for a 6-12 mm cable diameter.

230 V AC or 110 V AC Connect the power cable to the plinth with the phase linked to the brown cable, neutral linked to the blue and ground to the yellow/green. See illustration below.

Phase Neutral Ground

L N

Strain Relief Fitting

© Avitec AB

Connection Plinth

A1009300 Rev G

103 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


48 VDC Connect the power cable to the plinth with negative (-48V) to the uppermost connection and positive (0V) to the middle connection. Leave the lower connection empty. See illustration below.

Negative Positive

-48V 0V

Strain Relief Fitting

Connection Plinth

Recommended cable areas for 48VDC 0 - 10 meters between repeater and power supply

2,5 mm²

10 – 50 meters between repeater and power supply

4 mm²

Over 50 meters between repeater and power supply

Recommendation is to reconfigure the installation, or to make special arrangements to increase cable area

Requirements on 48 V power supply The 48V power supply must comply with SELV requirements, as defined in EN60950, which implies double isolation. The output power needs to be 48VDC +25%/-15%. For a 2 channel repeater the maximum input current is 8A, for a 4-channel repeater 16A. Note!

Back-up battery

In 4-channel repeaters there are two power supplies – one in each part of the box. Each power supply has its own power switch. Both need to be switched on.

Backup Battery There is a back-up battery installed in connection with the power supply. If there is a power failure the battery will supply enough power for the Control Module in the repeater to send information about the power failure. The backup battery can be switched on an off separately. The switch is placed adjacent to the input power switch on the power supply. In 4-channel repeaters there is a backup battery only in connection to the main power supply unit. At delivery the back-up battery is connected. It can be replaced by lifting the battery

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

104 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


pack out of the crate and disconnecting the cable.

Connector

4.2.8

Connect External Alarms

Connect external alarms

If the repeater is equipped with an external alarm interface card the connector plinth for the external alarms is located at the bottom of the repeater. The strain relief fitting in is a Pg 13.5 suitable for a 6-12 mm cable diameter. Connect the alarm cords to the plinth according to the pin layout below (in the standard version pins 14 – 18 are not used).

Pin # Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

External alarm 1A External alarm 1B External alarm 2A External alarm 2B External alarm 3A External alarm 3B External alarm 4A External alarm 4B Alarm +15V Alarm 0V Relay A Relay B GND NC NC NC NC NC

External Alarm Four external alarm sources can be connected to the repeater. These alarms operate on a voltage between 12 and 24VDC. The presence or absence of this voltage will trigger the alarm depending on how the alarm polarity has been configured via software. The alarms can be given individual names and be configured active-low or activehigh, so that the alarm is given either in the presence or absence of applied power. Active high means that an applied voltage of between 12 and 24 V will cause the external alarm indicator to turn red. Active low means that when there is no voltage the alarm indicator will turn red. The repeater can supply +15 VDC to an external alarm source through pin 9 and 10. The maximum allowed load is 50mA. The repeater contains a relay (pin 11 and 12) that can be connected to an external device to indicate an alarm. The relay can be configured to trigger on any number of

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

105 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


internal and external alarms. The maximum current that can be supplied is 50mA. The default setting is that the relay is open when there is no alarm and closed as an alarm occurs. For configuration of external alarms see section 4.4.4 Alarm Configuration.

4.2.9

Close Repeater

Close repeater

© Avitec AB

Close lid and lock repeater, or continue with the next section: Stat-up the Repeater.

A1009300 Rev G

106 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.3

Start-up the Repeater Caution!

Make sure the antenna cables or 50 ohm terminations are connected to the repeater’s antenna connectors before the repeater is turned on. Install the RMC

Install the RMC software on a computer from a CD or a diskette.

Connect to the LMT port

Open the repeater and connect the computer to the LMT port via a DB9 male connector with serial RS232 interface.

LMT port The communication parameters are set automatically by the RMC. Switch the repeater on

Switch the repeater on by using the power switches on the power supply. Note! See caution above! Power Switches

There are two switches. One is for the battery and one is for the power. Note! Always switch on both switches when the repeater should be switched on. Note!

The power switch has two positions; “on” and “stand by”. In the stand by position the repeater is still connected to the input power but not operational.

Note!

On 4-channel models both power supplies need to be switched on.

Check power supply LEDs

Power Supply LED Check the LEDs on the Power unit and Control Module to ensure that normal operation conditions have been attained. The power supply has 4 LEDs to indicate the status.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

107 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Input Power

+6V

+15V

+28V

LED 1, Input Power, Green Slow flash

Power supply unit operating on AC or DC

OFF

Power supply unit not operating



Quick flash




Quick flash




Quick flash


Examples LED 1 is flashing slowly, LED 2 – 4 are flashing slowly (once every 10 seconds) Input Power

+6V

+15V

+28V

=> power supply unit is operating without problem

LED 1 is flashing slowly, one or two of the red LEDs are flashing quickly Input Power

+6V

+15V

+28V

=> Input power is operating but there is a problem with some of the other voltages LED 1 is flashing slowly, all of the red LEDs are flashing quickly

Input Power

© Avitec AB

+6V

+15V

+28V

=> Input power is out and unit is operating on backup battery

A1009300 Rev G

108 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Check Control Module LEDs

Control Module LED The Control Module has 3 LEDs to indicate the status.

1

2

3

LED 1, Green OFF

GSM Module switched OFF

Permanent ON

GSM Module Switched on, not registered on network

Slow Flash

GSM Module switched on, registered on network (approximately 1 flash per second)

Quick flash

Module switched on, registered on network, call active (approx. 3 flashes per second)

LED 2, Red OFF

Control Module switched OFF

Slow Flash

Control Module switched on, status OK (once every 10 seconds)

Quick flash

Control Module switched on, one or more errors / alarms detected (except door status)

LED 3, Blue

Start the RMC

OFF

Control Module switched OFF, or no one logged in

Slow Flash

Control Module switched on, nobody logged in locally OK (once every 10 seconds)

Quick flash

Control Module switched on, someone logged in remotely or locally

The RMC can be started from the Start menu (or by clicking on the RMC icon, if made available).

Select “Cable” connection

Select communication port

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

109 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Enter user name and password

These are the default settings: User Name

Password

Authority

USERNAM1

PASSWRD1

read/write

USERNAM2

PASSWRD2

read/write

USERNAM3

PASSWRD3

read only

USERNAM4

PASSWRD4

read only

The system does not differentiate between upper and lower case letters. Note!

Do not use the number pad when entering numbers.

Note!

The controller keeps track of all illegal login attempts. If a user tries to login to the system without using the correct username or password, the user login will be blocked when a counter reaches a configurable threshold (default is 8). Every hour, the counter will be decreased by one, allowing for one more login attempt.

4.3.1

Choose Work View

Choose “Console” mode, “Terminal” mode or “Firmware” mode

Console mode

The console mode displays a large number of repeater parameters and contains a number of console pages. It adjusts its user interface to adapt to the features of the connected repeater.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

110 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Terminal mode

The terminal mode is used for communication with the repeater using its native command line interface. This interface follows the VT100 standard. For some special actions and error tracing, this mode gives an enhanced availability of the repeater. Firmware mode

The firmware mode is used for monitoring the currently installed software and for uploading new software to the repeater.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

111 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.4

Configure the Repeater

The following pages will guide you through the configuration of Channel Selective repeaters as well as Frequency Translating and Band Sifting repeaters utilizing the Repeater Maintenance Console (RMC) software. Configuration of a repeater is made partially on site and partially remotely through the AEM. At site the RF parameters are set and verified, the repeater is given a name (a tag) and the remote communication is set and verified. All other configuration can, and should be made from the AEM.

4.4.1

Set up RF Configuration

4.4.1.1


Ensure online communication with the repeater

Select “RF/Status”

This shows a 2-channel repeater.

Chain 1 Channel number

Uplink Attenuation Power level

Downlink Attenuation Power level

Saturation level

Set all power levels to “OFF”

Set “Power Level” in uplink and downlink to “OFF” in all chains

In the “Power Level” menu the output power can be limited to a specific value or the output power can be switched off completely by choosing “OFF”.

Set all attenuation

© Avitec AB

Set “Attenuation” to the maximum value in all chains, uplink and downlink.

A1009300 Rev G

112 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


levels to a maximum

Choose the maximum attenuation value from the drop down menu, in this case 30dB.

Set channel numbers

Set the channel numbers for all chains that are to be used in the installation. In this example the channel in Chain 1 is set to 23 and the channel in Chain 2 is set to 45.

Monitor the input power

Click on the RF Levels icon to monitor the RF levels.

RF levels icon

- 53

Input power level in downlink chain 1 is -53 dBm

dBm

Input power in the downlink of Chain 1 is dependant on the signal from the serving Base Station, in this example -53 dBm.

Configure the downlink in the channel that contains the BCCH

Note! Start with the chain that contains the BCCH. This chain has a stabile power level. In this example Chain 1contains the BCCH. Set “Power Level” in Chain 1 downlink to the desired value, in this example +37 dBm. This value can be based on a link budget, or be the maximum output the repeater can generate.

View the power meter in the top right corner of the screen. In this example the output power is +22 dBm.

- 53 dBm + 22 dBm

Adjust attenuation in the downlink

© Avitec AB

Output power level in downlink chain is +22 dBm

Lower the attenuation level step by step until the desired output power level is reached. In this example +37 dBm. Zero attenuation is the same as maximum gain.

A1009300 Rev G

113 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


- 53 dBm

+ 37 dBm

The current output power level is displayed in this box Note! The accuracy of this measure is ± 2dBm

The attenuation is adjusted in this box The desired power level is set in this box Saturation level indicator

Also use the saturation level indicator. The saturation level is indicated with plain text as well as with LEDs. The saturation level can be: Low (green), Ok (green), High (yellow) or Critical (red). The optimal level is OK, on the verge of High. To reach this value lower the attenuation step by step until the saturation reaches High. Then raise the attenuation one step. The saturation should now be back on OK. Note! Since the repeater has an ALC function (Automatic Level Control), the repeater will not transmit more power even if the attenuation is lowered even more.

Configure the downlink in the other chains

Apply the same Power Level and Attenuation in the other chains. If the BCCH is in Chain 1 this chain will show a stable power level whereas downlink and uplink power levels in the other chains depend on the amount of traffic. This will make these chains appear unstable. Note! All channels that are not to be used should always be switched off (set Power Level to “OFF”.)

Configure the uplink in all chains

Set the Power Level for the uplink in all chains to the same value as for the downlink (in this example +37dBm) or to any other level decided in the link budget. Set the Attenuation 2dB higher than in the downlink. In this example 16dB (14dB + 2dB) Since the BTS is more sensitive than a mobile unit there may be less signal gain from the mobile unit in to the BTS (UL) than in the opposite direction. The uplink attenuation can be adjusted more accurately later on, once the drive test signal measurements have been completed.

Make an antenna isolation test

© Avitec AB

See 4.1.3 Antenna Isolation

A1009300 Rev G

114 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Frequency Translating and Band Shifting Repeaters

Start with the donor unit Ensure online communication with the repeater

The Single Donor (SD) and Double Donor (DD) units are configured in the same way.

Select “RF/Status” window This shows a 2-channel repeater.

Chain 1 Channel number Link channel Uplink Attenuation Power Level

Downlink Attenuation Power Level

Saturation Status


Set “Power Level” in uplink and downlink to “OFF” in all chains

In the “Power Level” menu the output power can be limited to a specific value or the output power can be switched off completely by choosing “OFF”.

Set all attenuation levels to a maximum

Set “Attenuation” to the maximum value in all chains uplink and downlink. Choose the maximum attenuation value from the drop down menu, in this case 30dB.

Set channel numbers

Set the channel numbers for all chains that are to be used in the installation. In this example the channel in Chain 1 is set to 23 and the channel in Chain 2 is set to 45.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

115 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Set Link channel numbers

Set the Link channels to the desired values. In this example channel 12 in Chain 1 and channel 39 in Chain 2.

View the input power

Click on the RF Levels icon to monitor the RF levels. RF levels icon

+ 13 dBm

Input power level in downlink chain 1 is +13 dBm

The input power in the downlink of Chain 1 is in this example approximately +13dBm. This value reflects the output power from the repeater subtracted by 30dB (the coupler). Configure the downlink in the channel that contains the BCCH

Note! Start with the chain that contains the BCCH. This chain has a stabile power level. In this example Chain 1contains the BCCH. Set “Power Level” in Chain 1 downlink (the link) to the desired value, in this example +37 dBm. This value can be based on a link budget and depends for instance on the distance to the remote unit.

View the power meter in the top right corner of the screen. In this example the output power is +22 dBm.

+ 13 dBm + 22 dBm


© Avitec AB

Output power level in downlink chain 1 is +22 dBm

Lower the attenuation level step by step until the desired output power is reached. In this example +37 dBm. Zero attenuation is the same as maximum gain

A1009300 Rev G

116 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


+ 13 dBm

+ 37 dBm

The current output power level is displayed in this box Note! The accuracy of this measure is ± 2dBm

The attenuation is adjusted in this box The desired power level is set in this box Saturation level indicator

Also use the saturation level indicator. The saturation level is indicated with plain text as well as with LEDs. The saturation level can be: Low (green), Ok (green), High (yellow) or Critical (red). The optimal level is Ok, on the verge of High. To reach this value lower the attenuation step by step until the saturation reaches High. Then raise the attenuation one step. The saturation should now be back on Ok. Note! Since the repeater has an ALC function (Automatic Level Control), the repeater will not transmit more power even if you continue to lower the attenuation.

Configure the downlink in the other chains

Apply the same Power Level and Attenuation in the other chains. If the BCCH is in Chain 1 this chain will show a stable power level whereas downlink and uplink power levels in the other chains depend on the amount of traffic. This will make these chains appear unstable. Note! All channels that are not to be used should always be switched off. (Set Power Level to “OFF”.)


Set the Power Level for the uplink to -10, -13 or -15 dBm depending on the site design, for instance the number of sectors in the BTS and the level of noise allowed. Set the Attenuation 2dB higher than in the downlink. In this example the attenuation in the uplink is set to 16dB (14dB + 2dB= 16dB) Since the BTS is more sensitive than a mobile unit there may be less signal gain from the mobile unit in to the BTS (UL) than in the opposite direction. The uplink attenuation can be adjusted more accurately later on once the drive test signal measurements have been completed.

Continue with the remote unit

© Avitec AB

The configuration of the Remote Unit is almost identical to the configuration of the Donor Unit apart from the gain and output power settings.

A1009300 Rev G

117 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters



See instruction for donor unit above

Set all Attenuation levels to a maximum

See instruction for donor unit above

Set channel numbers

Set the same channel numbers as for the donor unit.

Set link channel numbers

Set the same link channel numbers as for the donor unit.

View the input power in the downlink

Click on the RF Levels icon to monitor the RF levels. RF levels icon

- 65 dBm

Input power level in downlink chain 1 is -65 dBm

The input power in the downlink is in this example approximately -65dBm. Note! The input signal level will vary between different repeater installations depending on the distance between the Donor Unit and the Remote Unit and other parameters affecting the signal’s propagation.

Configure the downlink in the channel that contains the BCCH

Set “Power Level” downlink to the desired value, in this example +43 dBm. This value can be based on a link budget, or be the maximum output the repeater can generate. 43


Lower the attenuation level step by step until the desired output power is reached. In this example +43 dBm. See instruction for donor unit above

Configure the downlink in all other chains

Apply the same Power Level and Attenuation in all chains. The presence of the BCCH will ensure stable power levels in this chain whereas downlink and uplink power levels in other chains will depend on the amount of traffic. This will make these chains appear unstable. Note! All channels that are not to be used should always be switched off. (Set Power Level to “off”.)


Set the Power Level in the uplink in all chains to +37 dBm (the same as for downlink in the donor unit). Set the Attenuation 2dB higher than in the downlink.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

118 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.4.2

Set Repeater Name (TAG)

The repeater can be given a name that can be used to identify the repeater, for instance the site name. The name can have up to 20 characters, no space is allowed. Select “Configuration” and “Product”.

Insert the name in this box

4.4.3

Set Up Remote Access

Insert the SIM card

Note! Make sure the SIM card has a Data Call/SMS number and is activated.

The modem is placed next to the LMT port close to the power supply

Pen SIM card holder

The SIM card holder is on top of the modem Insert the SIM card by pressing the lever on the left side of the card holder on the modem (with a pen or another narrow item) so that the card holder pops up. Insert the SIM card and press the card holder back into place. 4.4.3.1

Data Call Configuration

Note! If the repeater should be controlled by the AEM this Data Call configuration needs to be made. Select “Configuration” and “Communication”

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

119 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Pin Code

Select Data Call

Initialization string

Connect times

1.

Choose Data Call

2.

Set pin code, if the SIM card has PIN code request enabled

3.

Set the modem initialization string. This string differs between networks. Primary recommendation is AT+CBST=7,0,1. If remote communication cannot be established try 7,0,3 or 0,0,3 or 0,0,1. For more information please refer to section 3.7.5 Troubleshooting Remote Communication.

4.

Leave Network Connect Time and Modem Connect Time at default values.

5.

Tick “Enable Automatic Modem Power Cycling” for the modem to be power cycled once every 24 hours. Set the time at which the modem should be tested. This function ensures that the repeater always is logged in to the network.

Data call address Note! Not to be set at local installation

Note! Do not set addresses for the Data Call. The AEM will call the repeater after the installation is ready and initiate this communication.

Power Cycle Modem

© Avitec AB

Select Actions and initiate a Power Cycle Modem Logout from the drop-down menu.

A1009300 Rev G

120 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Log out Select “terminal” mode. Type Note! Do not choose “Disconnect”.

Wait

Wait until verification is ready

Log in remotely

Log in via the modem.

Select “Modem” connection

Select communication port

Save the repeater’s phone number in the RMC phone book

Test

© Avitec AB

Test that the remote access is functioning correctly

A1009300 Rev G

121 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.4.3.2

SMS Configuration

Note! AEM can not be used if the repeater is configured for SMS communication. Select “Configuration” and “Communication” Pin Code

Select SMS

Initialization string

Connect times

1.

Choose SMS

2.

Set pin code, if the SIM card has PIN code request enabled

3.

Set modem initialization string to be used at data call connections (if available in the network). This string differs between networks. Primary recommendation is AT+CBST=7,0,1. If remote communication cannot be established try 7,0,3 or 0,0,3 or 0,0,1.

4.

Leave Network Connect Time and Modem Connect Time at default values.

5.

Tick “Enable Automatic Modem Power Cycling” for the modem to be power cycled once every 24 hours. Set the time at which the modem should be tested. This function ensures that the repeater always is logged in to the network.

Set SMS addresses

Set SMS service centre address (the SMSC number to be used). Set Address 1. This is the address to which all SMS alarms and reports will be sent. Note! Always set this address. Set Address 2, 3 and 4 if needed.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

122 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Power Cycle Modem

Select Actions and initiate a Power Cycle Modem Logout from the drop-down menu.

Log out Select “terminal” mode. Type Note! Do not choose “Disconnect”.

Wait

Wait until verification is ready

Log in remotely

Log in via the modem

Select “Modem” connection Select communication port

Save the repeater’s phone number in the RMC phone book

Test

© Avitec AB

Test that the remote access is functioning correctly

A1009300 Rev G

123 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.4.4

Alarm Configuration

Select “Configuration” and “Alarms”

Alarm

Relay connection enabled Alarm enabled Acknowledgement is required

Trigger levels

Delay time

External Alarms configuration

The alarm configuration is set up automatically and should be left unmodified, except for “Power level downlink”. Note! Power level downlink (BCCH) should be adjusted to fit the installation in regards to the output power set. In this example a 3 second drop below 35dBm will cause an alarm. Configure external alarms

Four external alarms can be connected to the repeater. See also section 4.2.8 Connect External Alarms. Set active high or active low for each of these four alarms.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

124 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Give individual names to the external alarms

Edit names

4.4.5

Relay Output

The repeater can be ordered with a relay option. The relay, located on the External Alarm and Interface Module, can be used to indicate the summary status of the repeater. Each alarm source, external as well as internal, can be configured to affect the relay or not. See Alarm Configuration below. If the repeater is part of an antenna distribution system in for example a tunnel, all tunnel equipment can be monitored from one central location using current loops. This means that the tunnel service engineers can independently from the Avitec Element Manager staff be informed about the repeater status. Note! The relay status is not affected by the login / logout alarm parameters. The default setting is that the relay is open when there is no alarm and closed as an alarm occurs. For installation testing purposes, it is possible to test the open / close function of the relay. This test procedure makes sure the relay is closed for 2.5 seconds, then opens for 10 seconds, and finally closes for 2.5 seconds before going back to original state.

Click on Relay Test

4.4.6

Heartbeat Configuration

This configuration needs to be made if communication via SMS is to be used, otherwise this configuration is made when the repeater is integrated into the AEM. Select “Configuration” and “Reports”

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

125 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Repetition cycle Retransmissions Repetition cycle

4.4.7

AEM Report Configuration

This configuration should be left unchanged. If changes to the default settings are to be made these are done when the repeater is integrated into the AEM. Select “Configuration” and “Reports” Heartbeat

Alarms

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

126 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.5

Installation Checklists

4.5.1

Channel Selective Repeater Installation Check box when done

1

Repeater Installation

1.1

Ensure isolation between server and donor antenna is adequate

1.2

Measured isolation ____

1.3

Proper grounding made and EMV protection installed

1.4

Cable from donor antenna connected to donor antenna port

1.5

Cable to server antenna connected to server antenna port

1.6

Input power cable connected to the repeater unit

1.7

Cable protection cover bolted to repeater unit, any outdoor connections waterproofed

2

Repeater Unit Setup

2.1

Repeater switched on

2.2

Power Supply led and Control Module led shows no error

2.3

Channels set to: 1 ___ 2 ___ 3___ 4___

2.4

BCCH in chain __

2.5

Power level channel with BCCH downlink set to _____

2.6

Attenuation channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (saturation level checked)

2.7

Power level channel with BCCH uplink set to same as downlink

2.8

Attenuation channel with BCCH uplink set to same as downlink

2.9

Power level and attenuation in other channels set to same levels

2.10


2.11

Output power downlink channel with BCCH ____ (reading from RMC)

2.12

Repeater TAG set to ___________

2.13

Repeater secured and locked

Installation date:_______________ Installer signature:_____________________ Site name: ________________Site number: ______________ GPS coordinates:________

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

127 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.5.2

Preparation Sheet, Frequency Translating Repeater

General Channels to be repeated ___, ___, ___ and ____ => to donor checklist Link channel (s) to be used ___, ___, ___ and ____ => to donor checklist

Donor Unit BTS output power

+

__dBm

Feeder loss between BTS and coupler

-

___dB

Coupling loss in coupler

-

___dB

Feeder loss between coupler and donor unit

-

___dB

__________________________________________________________________ Downlink input power to donor unit (Pin)

=

Desired link power (Plink): (+37/+34/+31dBm)

__dBm

___dBm*

=> to donor checklist (Power level downlink) Required donor downlink gain (G) = Plink – Pin

=

___dB

Donor downlink attenuation = 42 – G (SD) / 45 - G (DD)

=

___dB

Attenuation setting to be used (closest larger even number)

___ dB

=> to donor checklist (Attenuation downlink) Desired uplink ALC level -10/-13/-16 (SD) / -7/-10/-13 (DD)

___dBm

=> to donor checklist (Power level uplink)

Link path Donor link antenna feeder loss

+

___dB

Donor link antenna gain

-

___dBi

Link path loss

+

___dB

Remote link antenna gain

-

___dBi

Remote link antenna feeder loss

+

___dB

_________________________________________________________________ Total link loss (L)

© Avitec AB

=

A1009300 Rev G

___dB

128 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Remote Unit Downlink input power from link antenna (Pin) = Plink-L

___dBm

Desired remote server power (Pout): 40/37/34 (IR) / 43/40/37 (ER)

___dBm

=> to remote checklist (Power level downlink) Required remote downlink gain (G) = Pout – Pin

=

___dB

Remote unit downlink attenuation = 105–G (IR) / 108-G (ER)

=

___dB

Attenuation setting to be used (closest larger even number)

___dB

=> to remote checklist (Attenuation downlink) Desired link power (+37/+34/+31)

___dBm*

=> to remote checklist (Power level uplink)

*Note! Link power should be the same for remote and donor

Date:__________________ Calculated by:_____________________ Site Name: __________________________ Site Number: _____________________

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

129 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.5.3

Frequency Translating Repeater, Donor Unit Check box when done

1.

Coupler Installation

1.1

-30dB Coupler installed on BTS main antenna feeder

1.2

Type N connector closer to antenna terminated with 50 ohm plug

1.3

Type N connector closer to BTS connected to donor cable

1.4

BTS operating normally with coupler installed verified

1.5

Coupler weatherproofed

2.

Donor Unit Installation

2.1


2.2

Cable from coupler connected to donor port

2.3

Cable to link antenna connected to link antenna port

2.4


2.5

Cable protection cover bolted to donor unit, any outdoor connections waterproofed

3.

Donor Unit Setup

3.1

Donor unit switched on

3.2


3.3

Channels set to: 1 ___ 2 ___ 3 ___ 4___

3.4

Link channels set to: 1 ___ 2 ___ 3 ___ 4___

3.5

BCCH in channel ____

3.6

Power level link channel with BCCH downlink set to _____

3.6

Attenuation link channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (according to budget)

3.7

Power level channel with BCCH uplink set to ___ (according to budget)

3.8

Attenuation channel with BCCH uplink set to same as link channel downlink

3.9

Power levels and attenuation in other channels and links set to same levels

3.10


3.11

Output power downlink channel with BCCH ____ (reading from RMC)

3.12

Repeater TAG set to _______________

3.13



© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

130 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


4.5.4

Frequency Translating Repeater, Remote Unit Check box when done

1.

Remote Unit Installation

1.1

Ensure adequate isolation between link and serving antenna (>75dB)

1.2


1.3

Cable from link antenna connected to link antenna port

1.4

Cable to server antenna connected to server antenna port

1.5


1.6

Cable protection cover bolted to donor unit, any outdoor connections waterproofed

2.

Remote Unit Setup

2.1

Remote unit switched on

2.2


2.3

Channels set to same as donor

2.4

Link channels set to same as donor

2.5

Power level channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (according to budget)

2.6

Attenuation channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (according to budget)

2.7

Power level link channel uplink set to same as power level as link channel with BCCH downlink in donor unit

2.8

Attenuation link channel uplink set to same as attenuation as channel with BCCH downlink

2.9

Power levels and attenuation in other channels and links set to same levels

2.10


2.11

Output power downlink channel (with BCCH) ____ (reading from RMC)

2.12

Repeater TAG set to ___

2.13



© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

131 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


5

Maintenance

5.1

General

The system normally operates without any operator intervention or maintenance. In the unlikely event of a unit failure, the field replaceable components (antenna unit, cables, etc.) should be checked and replaced if faulty and the system restored. A failed unit can be removed and replaced with a spare while the rest of the system (other repeaters) is operating. However, the power supply of the failed repeater should be isolated from AC mains and DC power before any module is replaced. Should the system malfunction, the condition of the antenna systems as well as the continuity of the cabling should be checked before replacing any of the repeater modules. If the repeater is to be sent back to Avitec the original packing or an equivalent packing needs to be used. Caution! If a shipment of a repeater back to Avitec is made within the period of guarantee the original packing must be used.

Caution Please be aware that the equipment may, during certain conditions become very warm and can cause minor injuries if handled without any protection, such as gloves.

5.2

Preventive Maintenance

The Avitec repeaters do not require any preventative maintenance apart from changing the backup battery once every three years. Caution Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to local laws and instructions.

5.3

Product Disposal

Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and regulations. For detailed information regarding materials, please refer to Avitec AB.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

132 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6

Specifications

Note! All data is subject to change without prior notice.

6.1

CSR 922 (R)

Electrical Specifications Frequency range Uplink, UL

880 – 915 MHz (E-GSM900)

Frequency range Downlink, DL

925 – 960 MHz (E-GSM900)

Frequency range Uplink, UL

890 – 915 MHz (P-GSM900)


935 – 960 MHz (P-GSM900)


876 – 880 MHz (GSM-R)


921 – 925 MHz (GSM-R)


35 MHz (E-GSM) 25 MHz (P-GSM) 4 MHz (GSM-R)

Number of channels

1–2

Channel programming

200 kHz channel spacing

Selectivity

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in pass band

< 2 dB

Noise figure

2.5 dB typical, < 3 dB at max gain

Maximum input level, non destructive

+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 μs typical

Output power per carrier (UL/DL)

+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK + 34 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

Modulation Accuracy GSM / GMSK

< 2.5 ° RMS and < 10 ° peak at +37 dBm

EDGE / 8-PSK

< 3.5 % EVM RMS at + 34 dBm

Intermodulation

< - 36 dBm (two carriers at + 37 dBm, 600 kHz spacing)

Spurious emissions

< - 36 dBm for 9 kHz – 1 GHz < - 30 dBm for 1 GHz – 13 GHz

Gain

60 – 90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps

System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

133 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Power Consumption

160 W typical (traffic dependent)

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions

540 x 350 x 150 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight

22 kg

Environmental Specifications EMC

See compliance below

Operating Temperature

- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity

ETSI EN 300 019-2-4 (see compliance below)

MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with

R&TTE Directive including ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4/GSM 11.26) ETS EN 301 498-8 EN 60 950

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

134 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.2

CSR 924 (R)


880 – 915 MHz (E-GSM900)


925 – 960 MHz (E-GSM900)


890 – 915 MHz (P-GSM900)


935 – 960 MHz (P-GSM900)


876 – 880 MHz (GSM-R)


921 – 925 MHz (GSM-R)


35 MHz (E-GSM) 25 MHz (P-GSM) 4 MHz (GSM-R)

Number of channels

1–4

Channel programming


Selectivity

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 65 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in pass band

< 2 dB

Noise figure

3 dB typical, < 3.5 dB at max gain


+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 μs typical





EDGE / 8-PSK


Intermodulation


Spurious emissions


Gain

60-90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps

System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

Power Consumption


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

135 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL Mechanical Specifications Dimensions

540 x 350 x 220 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight

33 kg




- 25 to + 55 °C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 °C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with

R&TTE Directive including ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4/GSM 11.26) ETS EN 301 498-8 EN 60 950

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

136 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.3

CSR1822


1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS-1800)


1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS-1800)


75 MHz

Number of channels

1-2

Channel programming

200 kHz Channel spacing

Selectivity

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB

Noise figure



+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 µs typical


+ 37dBm GSM/ GMSK + 34 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power



EDGE / 8-PSK


Intermodulation


Spurious emissions

< - 36 dBm for 9 kHz - 1 GHz < - 30 dBm for 1 GHz - 13 GHz

Gain

60 - 90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps

System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

Power Consumption



540 x 350 x 150 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight

22 kg

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

137 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters





- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with

R& TTE Directive including ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26 ) ETS EN 301 498-8 EN 60 950

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

138 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.4

CSR1824


1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS-1800)


1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS-1800)


75 MHz

Number of channels

1-4

Channel programming


Selectivity

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB

Noise figure



+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 µs typical

Output power per carrier (UL/DL )




EDGE / 8-PSK


Intermodulation


Spurious emissions


Gain

60-90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps.

System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

Power Consumption



540 x 350 x 220 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight

33 kg

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

139 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters





- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

140 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.5

CSR1922


1850 - 1910 MHz (PCS-1900)


1930 - 1990 MHz (PCS-1900)


60 MHz

Number of channels

1-2

Channel programming


Selectivity

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB

Noise figure



+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 µs typical


+ 37dBm GSM/ GMSK + 34 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power



EDGE / 8-PSK


Intermodulation


Spurious emissions


Gain


System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

Power Consumption



540 x 350 x 150 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight

22 kg

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

141 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters





- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

142 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.6

CSR1924


1850 - 1910 MHz (PCS-1900)


1930 - 1990 MHz (PCS-1900)


60 MHz

Number of channels

1-4

Channel programming


Selectivity

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB

Noise figure

3 dB typical, < 3, 5 dB at max gain


+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 µs typical

Output power per carrier (UL/DL )




EDGE / 8-PSK


Intermodulation


Spurious emissions


Gain

60-90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps

System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

Power Consumption



540 x 350 x 220 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight

33 kg

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

143 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters





- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

144 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.7

CSFT 922 (R) and CSFT 924 (R)

Electrical Specification Frequency range Uplink, UL

880 – 915 MHz (E-GSM900)


925 – 960 MHz (E-GSM900)


890 – 915 MHz (P-GSM900)


935 – 960 MHz (P-GSM900)


876 – 880 MHz (GSM-R)


921 – 925 MHz (GSM-R)

Number of channels

1 – 2 resp 1-4

Channel programming


Selectivity, donor unit (SD and DD)

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 65 dB at 600 kHz

Selectivity, remote unit (IR and ER)

> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB

Noise figure CSFT 922 Donor unit (SD) and (DD) UL


DL

N/A

Remote unit (IR) and (ER) UL/DL




DL

N/A



Maximum input level, no damage Donor unit (SD) and (DD) UL

+ 10 dBm

DL

+ 23 dBm


+ 10 dBm

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

145 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


5.8 μs typical

Propagation delay

Output power per carrier CSFT 922 Donor unit (SD) DL


UL

- 10 dBm GSM/ GMSK - 13 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power

Donor unit (DD) DL


UL


Remote unit (IR) DL


UL


Remote unit (ER) DL


UL


Output power per carrier CSFT924 All values 3 dB less than above

Gain

CSFT922

CSFT924

Donor unit (SD)

max 42 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps


Donor unit (DD)



Remote unit (IR)



Remote unit (ER)



Gain Flatness (200 kHz BW)

± 1 dB

Gain Flatness (operational bandwidth)

± 1.5 dB, at constant temperature

Input to Link Channel Frequency Error

< 1 x 10-9

Modulation Accuracy CSFT 922 Donor unit (SD and DD) DL

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

146 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK

< 3.5 % EVM RMS at +34 dBm average power

UL GSM / GMSK

< 2.5 ° RMS and < 10 ° peak at -10 dBm

EDGE / 8-PSK

< 3.5 % EVM RMS at -13 dBm average power

Remote unit (IR) DL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK

< 4 % EVM RMS at +37 dBm average power

UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Remote unit (ER) DL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Modulation Accuracy CSFT 924 Same as above but measured at 3 dBm lower power levels.

Intermodulation CSFT922 Donor unit (SD) and (DD)

< -36 dBm (two carriers at + 37 dBm DL, 600 kHz spacing) < -70 dBm (two carriers at -10 dBm UL, 600 kHz spacing)

Remote unit (IR)

< -36 dBm (two carriers at + 40 dBm DL, 600 kHz spacing) < -36 dBm (two carriers at +37 dBm UL, 600 kHz spacing)

Remote unit (ER)


Intermodulation CSFT 924 Same as above but at 3 dB lower output levels.

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

147 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Spurious emissions


System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

Power Consumption CSFT 922 Donor unit (SD and DD)

110W typical

Remote unit (IR and ER)

200W typical


240W typical


240W typical

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions CSFT 922

540 x 350 x 150 mm

Dimensions CSFT 924

540 x 350 x 220 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight CSFT 922

22 kg

Weight CSFT 924

33 kg




- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with

R& TTE Directive including ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26) ETS EN 301 498-8 EN 60 950

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

148 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.8

CSFT 1822 and CSFT 1824


1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS 1800)


1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS 1800)

Number of channels

1 – 2 resp. 1-4

Channel programming



> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 65 dB at 600 kHz


> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB



DL

N/A





DL

N/A




+ 10 dBm

DL

+ 23 dBm


+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 µs typical


© Avitec AB


A1009300 Rev G

149 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


UL


Donor unit (DD) DL


UL


Remote unit (IR) DL


UL


Remote unit (ER) DL


UL


Output power per carrier CSFT1824 All values 3 dBm less than above

Gain

CSFT1822

CSFT1824

Donor unit (SD)



Donor unit (DD)



Remote unit (IR)



Remote unit (ER)




± 1 dB




< 1 x 10-9

Modulation Accuracy CSFT 1822 Donor unit (SD) and (DD) DL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Remote unit (IR)

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

150 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


DL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK




EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Modulation Accuracy CSFT 1824 Same as above but measured at 3 DB lower power levels.

Intermodulation CSFT 1822 Donor unit (SD) and (DD)


Remote unit (IR)


Remote unit (ER)


Intermodulation CSFT 1822 Same as above but at 3 dB lower output power levels.

Spurious emissions


System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

151 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters



150W typical


240W typical


240W typical


270W typical

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions CSFT1822

540 x 350 x 150 mm (per unit)

Dimensions CSFT1824

540 x 350 x 220 mm (per unit)

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight CSFT1822

22 kg

Weight CSFT1824

33 kg




- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

152 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.9

CSFT 1922 and CSFT 1924


1850 - 1920 MHz (PS 1900)


1930 - 1990 MHz (PS 1900)


60 MHz

Number of channels

1 – 2 resp 1-4

Channel programming



> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 65 dB at 600 kHz


> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB



DL

N/A



Noise figure CSFT1924 Donor unit (SD) and (DD) UL


DL

N/A




+ 10 dBm

DL

+ 23 dBm


+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 µs typical


© Avitec AB


A1009300 Rev G

153 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


UL


Donor unit (DD) DL


UL


Remote unit (IR) DL


UL


Remote unit (ER) DL


UL


Output power per carrier CSFT 1924 All values 3 dB less than above.

Gain

CSFT1922

CSFT1924

Donor unit (SD)



Donor unit (DD)



Remote unit (IR)



Remote unit (ER)




± 1 dB



Link to output Channel Frequency Error

< 1 x 10-9



EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Remote unit (IR)

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

154 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


DL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK




EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Modulation Accuracy CSFT 1924 Same as above but measured at 3 dB lower power levels.

Intermodulation CSFT1922 Donor unit (SD) and (DD)


Remote unit (IR)


Remote unit (ER)


Intermodulation CSFT 1924 Same as above but at 3 dB lower power levels.

Spurious emissions


System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC


© Avitec AB

150W typical

A1009300 Rev G

155 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters



240W typical


240W typical


270W typical

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions CSFT1922

540 x 350 x 150 mm

Dimensions CSFT1924

540 x 350 x 220 mm

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight CSFT 1922

22 kg

Weight CSFT 1924

33 kg




- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

156 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.10 CSFT 91822 and CSFT 91824 Electrical Specification Frequency range Uplink, UL

880 – 915 MHz (E-GSM900)


925 – 960 MHz (E-GSM900)


890 – 915 MHz (P-GSM900)


935 – 960 MHz (P-GSM900)


1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS-1800)


1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS-1800)


35 MHz (E-GSM) 25 MHz (P-GSM)

Number of channels

1 – 2 resp. 1 – 4

Channel programming



> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 65 dB at 600 kHz


> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB



DL

N/A





DL

N/A




+ 10 dBm

DL

+ 23 dBm

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

157 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters



+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 μs typical



UL


Donor unit (DD) DL


UL


Remote unit (IR) DL


UL


Remote unit (ER) DL


UL


Output power per carrier CSFT 91824 All values 3dBm less that above

Gain Gain

CSFT91822

CSFT91824

Donor unit (SD)



Donor unit (DD)



Remote unit (IR)



Remote unit (ER)




± 1 dB




< 1 x 10-9

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

158 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters




EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK




EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK




EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Modulation Accuracy CSFT 91824 Same as above but measured at 3dB lower power levels

Intermodulation CSFT 91822 Donor unit (SD) and (DD)


Remote unit (IR)


Remote unit (ER)


Intermodulation CSFT 91824 Same as above but at 3dB lower output power levels

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

159 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Spurious emissions


System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC


150 W typical


220 W typical


240 W typical


240 W typical


540 x 350 x 150 mm (per unit)

Dimensions CSFT 91824

540 x 350 x 220 mm (per unit)

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight CSFT91822

22 kg

Weight CSFT91824

33 kg




- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

160 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


6.11 CSFT 18922 and CSFT 18924 Electrical Specifications Frequency range Uplink, UL

1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS 1800)


1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS 1800)

Link Frequency Range Uplink, UL

880 – 915 MHz (E-GSM 900)

Link Frequency Range Downlink, DL

925 – 960 MHz (E-GSM 900)


75 MHz

Number of channels

1 – 2 resp 1-4

Channel programming



> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 65 dB at 600 kHz


> 60 dB at 400 kHz > 70 dB at 600 kHz

Ripple in passband

< 2 dB



DL

N/A





DL

N/A




+ 10 dBm

DL

+ 23 dBm


+ 10 dBm

Propagation delay

5.8 µs typical

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

161 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters




UL


Donor unit (DD) DL


UL


Remote unit (IR) DL


UL


Remote unit (ER) DL


UL


Output power per carrier CSFT 18924 All values 3dBm less that above

Gain Gain

CSFT18922

CSFT18924

Donor unit (SD)



Donor unit (DD)



Remote unit (IR)



Remote unit (ER)




± 1 dB




< 1 x 10-9

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

162 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Modulation Accuracy Donor unit (SD) and (DD) DL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK




EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK




EDGE / 8-PSK


UL GSM / GMSK


EDGE / 8-PSK


Modulation Accuracy CSFT 18924 Same as above but measured at 3dB lower power levels

Intermodulation Donor unit (SD) and (DD)


Remote unit (IR)


Remote unit (ER)


Intermodulation CSFT 18924 Same as above but at 3dB lower output power levels

© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

163 (164)

GSM-EDGE Repeaters


Spurious emissions


System impedance

50 ohm

Antenna connectors

DIN 7/16

Electrical ratings

110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC


110 W typical


220 W typical


200 W typical


270 W typical


540 x 350 x 150 mm (per unit)

Dimensions CSFT 18924

540 x 350 x 220 mm (per unit)

Enclosure

Aluminum (IP 65)

Weight CSFT 18922

22 kg

Weight CSFT 18924

33 kg




- 25 to + 55 ° C

Storage

- 30 to + 70 ° C

Humidity


MTBF

> 100 000 hrs

Complies with


© Avitec AB

A1009300 Rev G

164 (164)

RMC MANUAL

Repeater Maintenance Console Short Guide Valid from RMC version 2.17

Copyright © 2005 AVITEC AB All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language without the prior written permission of Avitec AB. The manufacturer has made every effort to ensure that the instructions contained in this document are adequate and free of errors and omissions. The manufacturer will, if necessary, explain issues which may not be covered by this document. The manufacturer's liability for any errors in the document is limited to the correction of errors and the aforementioned advisory services. This document has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using them. The manufacturer welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continual development and improvement of the documentation in the best way possible from the user's viewpoint. Please submit your comments to the nearest Avitec AB sales representative.

© Avitec AB

SW 022 93 00 rev C

1 (6)

RMC MANUAL

1

Installation

1.1

Requirements

CPU

Pentium, 200 MHz (Pentium III, 500 MHz recommended)

RAM

64 MB (128 MB recommended)

Hard Drive

10 MB free disk space

CD-ROM

Required for installation

Video resolution

800 x 600 with at least 15 bit color depth (approx. 32000 colors) 24 bit color depth (16.7 million colors) recommended It is possible to run the program in 256 or 16 color modes, but colors will appear distorted

Operating system

1.2

Windows 98SE/NT/2000/XP

Installation Procedure

1.

Ensure the computer and operation system complies with the requirements above.

2.

Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM reader. This will in most cases auto-start the setup program. If not select your CD-ROM drive and double-click the file “Setup.exe”.

3.

Follow the setup program guide through the installation process. Specify where the program should be installed.

4.

When the installation is finished, start the RMC from the” Start” menu (no reboot is needed)

1.3

Connection Setup

The RMC opens in Console mode

© Avitec AB

SW 022 93 00 rev C

2 (6)

RMC MANUAL

Cable Connection Set up Select “Cable” and “Next” Select the serial port to be used. Select “Connect”

1.3.1

Modem Connection Set up

Select “Modem” and “Next” Select the modem to use. Select “Next”

The RMC automatically receives a list of available modems from the Windows operation system. Note!

It is important that the modem is installed in Windows according to the manual provided by the modem manufacturer.

Enter the phone number. Type the number or choose one from the phone book.

Select “Connect” and wait for the connection to be established

© Avitec AB

SW 022 93 00 rev C

3 (6)

RMC MANUAL

1.3.2

Login

Enter username and password (in terminal mode the login prompt is text based). Select “Next”

1.4

How to Change a Parameter

There is a two step procedure to change a parameter in RMC. Change the value

A value can be changed by typing it or by choosing a value from a drop down menu

In this case there is a drop down menu. Click on ”!” to the right of the box and chose a value. Apply or cancel the change

As soon as a change is made or a value is inserted this symbol appears

The change is applied by clicking the green “accept button” The change is canceled by clicking the red cross (or by pressing Esc)

1.5

How to Use the Phone Book

Modem phone numbers to can be stored in the RMC phone book. Each computer user is allocated an individual RMC phonebook which is stored in the windows registry. Select Modem during login. Initial screen

© Avitec AB

SW 022 93 00 rev C

4 (6)

RMC MANUAL

1.5.1

Add a Phone Number

Type the number in the phone number edit box Click “Add” This brings up a dialog box Enter a description of the phonebook entry Click “Ok”

1.5.2

Edit a Phone Number

Select a number in the list Select “Edit” This brings up a dialog box Make the changes Select “Ok”

1.5.3

Delete a Phone Number

Select a phone number in the list Select “Delete” Confirm

© Avitec AB

SW 022 93 00 rev C

5 (6)

RMC MANUAL

1.5.4

Import/Export Phonebook Data

Select “Phonebook Options” Choose between the options: !

Save phonebook

!

Restore the phonebook

!

Synchronize phonebook

The file extension is RPF. Files can be used in RMC versions 2.00 and later. Phonebook data from RMC version 1.xx (INI-files) can also be imported.

© Avitec AB

SW 022 93 00 rev C

6 (6)

COMMAND AND ATTRIBUTE SUMMARY

Command and Attribute Summary for Avitec AB EDGE/GSM repeaters Document Revision 1.0 Software Version: 1.04 Release date: 2005-02-02

© Avitec AB

February 2005

1 (102)


Contact Information Phone:

+46 8 475 47 00

Fax: Email:

+46 8 475 47 99 [email protected]

Web:

http://www.avitec.se

Address: Avitec AB Box 20116 S-161 02 BROMMA SWEDEN

© COPYRIGHT AVITEC AB 2005 All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language without the prior written permission of Avitec AB. The manufacturer has made every effort to ensure that the instructions contained in the documents are adequate and free of errors and omissions. The manufacturer will, if necessary, explain issues which may not be covered by the documents. The manufacturer's liability for any errors in the documents is limited to the correction of errors and the aforementioned advisory services. This document has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using them. The manufacturer welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continual development and improvement of the documentation in the best way possible from the user's viewpoint. Please submit your comments to the nearest Avitec AB sales representative.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

2 (102)


Contents 1

Introduction...................................................................................................................... 8

2

Repeater Naming Conventions ........................................................................................ 8

3

GET and SET-Attributes ................................................................................................. 9 3.1

ADD - SMS Address Access List .................................................................................... 9

3.2

ADC - Active Devices Count........................................................................................... 9

3.3

AIC - Antenna Isolation Measurement Channels............................................................. 9

3.4

AIE - Antenna Isolation Measurement Enabled............................................................. 10

3.5

AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurement Status............................................................... 10

3.6

AIP - Antenna Isolation Measurement Progress ............................................................ 11

3.7

AIT - Antenna Isolation Measurement Timepoint ......................................................... 11

3.8

AL1 - Compressed Alarm Format.................................................................................. 12

3.9


3.10


3.11


3.12


3.13


3.14


3.15

ALA - Alarm Configuration Settings............................................................................. 13

3.16

ALL - Compact Message for Getting Status and RF Parameters from Repeater ........... 13

3.17

ALV - Analog Levels..................................................................................................... 14

3.18

AMD - Status of Amplifier Chain Downlink................................................................. 15

3.19

AMU - Status of Amplifier Chain Uplink...................................................................... 15

3.20

ASC - Telephone Number to OMC, or Address of SMSC ............................................ 16

3.21

ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink Status ..................................................... 16

3.22

ASL - Amplifier Chain Saturation Level ....................................................................... 17

3.23

ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink Status .......................................................... 18

3.24

ATD - Attenuation Downlink ........................................................................................ 19

3.25

ATU - Attenuation Uplink ............................................................................................. 20

3.26

BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment ............................................................................ 20

3.27

CFG - Compact message to receive repeater configuration ........................................... 20

3.28

CHA - Channel Configuration ....................................................................................... 21

3.29

CHL - Channel Limits.................................................................................................... 22

3.30

COM - Status of Communication Between Controller and Hardware Devices ............. 22

3.31

DAT - Date .................................................................................................................... 24

3.32

DDI - Detailed Device Information ............................................................................... 25

3.33

DEV - Sets the Different Communications Methods ..................................................... 25

3.34

DOO - Door Status......................................................................................................... 26

3.35

EAC - External Alarm Configuration ............................................................................ 26

3.36

EAD - External Alarm Description................................................................................ 26

3.37

EX1 - External Alarm 1 ................................................................................................. 27

3.38


© Avitec AB

February 2005

3 (102)


3.39


3.40


3.41

EXT - Configuration of External Alarms....................................................................... 28

3.42

FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver Status ................................................................................ 28

3.43

FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter Status ............................................................................ 29

3.44

HDC - Hardware Device Count ..................................................................................... 29

3.45

HDI - Hardware Device Information ............................................................................. 29

3.46

HWV - Hardware Version ............................................................................................. 30

3.47

ILA - Invalid Login Attempts ........................................................................................ 30

3.48

IOD - Input Overload Downlink Status ......................................................................... 30

3.49

IOU - Input Overload Uplink Status .............................................................................. 31

3.50

IPL - Input Level............................................................................................................ 31

3.51

LAI - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Level......................................................... 32

3.52

LAR - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Reply ....................................................... 33

3.53

LLN - Log Length.......................................................................................................... 33

3.54

LIT - Log Item ............................................................................................................... 33

3.55

LMT - Timeout in Minutes ............................................................................................ 34

3.56

LNK - Link Channel ...................................................................................................... 34

3.57

LPC - Last Power Cycling of Modem............................................................................ 35

3.58

LVD - Peak Power Out level Downlink......................................................................... 35

3.59

LVU - Peak Power Out level Uplink ............................................................................. 36

3.60

MAD - Main Address .................................................................................................... 37

3.61

MAR - Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle .................................................................... 38

3.62

MCT - Modem Connection Time .................................................................................. 38

3.63

MDL - Repeater Model.................................................................................................. 38

3.64

MGA - Maximum Gain.................................................................................................. 39

3.65

MIS - Modem Initialization String................................................................................. 39

3.66

MPE - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Enabled ....................................................... 40

3.67

MPT - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Timepoint.................................................... 40

3.68

MNR - Maximum Number of Alarm Retransmissions ................................................. 41

3.69

MRR - Maximum Report Retransmission ..................................................................... 41

3.70

MSG - Message Counter................................................................................................ 41

3.71

MTP - Modem Type ...................................................................................................... 42

3.72

NCH - Number of Channels........................................................................................... 42

3.73

NCT - Network Connect Time....................................................................................... 43

3.74

NOL - Number of Successful Logins............................................................................. 43

3.75

NUA - Next Un-acknowledged Alarm........................................................................... 43

3.76

OLV - Optical Levels..................................................................................................... 43

3.77

OPL - Output Levels ...................................................................................................... 44

3.78

ORP - OMC to Controller Password.............................................................................. 45

3.79

PDC - Power Downlink measurement Configuration .................................................... 45

3.80

PDL - Power Downlink Level........................................................................................ 46

3.81

PIN - Sets the PIN Code Used to Lock Up GSM Module ............................................. 47

© Avitec AB

February 2005

4 (102)


3.82

PLB - Level of BCCH output power in Downlink......................................................... 47

3.83

PSD - Power Supply Distribution Levels....................................................................... 48

3.84

PSL - Status of Power Supply Level.............................................................................. 50

3.85

PTM - Power Supply Temperature Status...................................................................... 50

3.86

PW1 - Status of Power 1 ................................................................................................ 51

3.87


3.88


3.89


3.90

PWD - Set Password to Access Repeater....................................................................... 55

3.91

RCA - Repetition Cycle for non Acknowledged Alarms............................................... 55

3.92

RCH - Repetition Cycle for Heartbeat ........................................................................... 56

3.93

RCR - Repetition Cycle for Reports .............................................................................. 56

3.94

RFP - RF Parameters...................................................................................................... 56

3.95

RID - Repeater ID .......................................................................................................... 57

3.96

RLY - Relay Status ........................................................................................................ 57

3.97

ROP - Controller to OMC password. ............................................................................. 58

3.98

RSP - Repeater Status Parameters.................................................................................. 58

3.99

SAC - SMS Acknowledge Configuration ...................................................................... 58

3.100 SFT - Secondary OMC address Fallback Timer ............................................................ 59 3.101 SIS - System Information String .................................................................................... 59 3.102 SIT - System Initialization Time.................................................................................... 60 3.103 SSC - Secondary Service Center Address...................................................................... 61 3.104 SUT - System Up Time.................................................................................................. 61 3.105 SWV - Software Version ............................................................................................... 61 3.106 SZD - Status of Synthesizers in Downlink Chain .......................................................... 61 3.107 SZU - Status of Synthesizers in Uplink Chain ............................................................... 62 3.108 TAG - Equipment Tag ................................................................................................... 63 3.109 TEM - Status of Temperature ........................................................................................ 63 3.110 TIM - Time .................................................................................................................... 63 3.111 TMD - Terminal Mode .................................................................................................. 64 3.112 UID - User ID ................................................................................................................ 64 3.113 VLD - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Downlink ............................................................... 64 3.114 VLU - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Uplink .................................................................... 65 3.115 WRD - Status of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink ........................................... 65 3.116 WRL - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Level.................................................................. 66

4

Traffic Related GET and SET Attributes ...................................................................... 67 4.1

AIS - Active Intervals String.......................................................................................... 67

4.2

ATS - Active Timeslots ................................................................................................. 67

4.3

CTI - Current Traffic Interval ........................................................................................ 68

4.4

LAT - Last Active Timeslot........................................................................................... 68

4.5

PRF - Sending of Report................................................................................................ 68

4.6

TAT - Traffic Activity Threshold .................................................................................. 69

4.7

TTL - Traffic Threshold................................................................................................. 69

© Avitec AB

February 2005

5 (102)


5

6

4.8

TPD - Timepoint of Traffic Report Transmission.......................................................... 69

4.9

TRF - Traffic String ....................................................................................................... 70

4.10

UCI - Utilization Current Interval.................................................................................. 70

4.11

ULI - Utilization Last Interval ....................................................................................... 71

Alarm Attribute Configuration ...................................................................................... 72 5.1

AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurements ........................................................................ 72

5.2

AMD - Amplifier Chain Downlink................................................................................ 74

5.3

AMU - Amplifier Chain Uplink..................................................................................... 74

5.4

ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink................................................................ 74

5.5

ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink..................................................................... 75

5.6

BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment ............................................................................ 75

5.7

CLR - Changes made by logged in user......................................................................... 76

5.8

COM - Communication Between Controller and Active Devices ................................. 76

5.9

DOO - Door ................................................................................................................... 76

5.10


5.11


5.12


5.13


5.14

FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver ........................................................................................... 78

5.15

FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter ....................................................................................... 79

5.16

ILI - Illegal Logins exceeded limit................................................................................. 79

5.17

IOD - Input Overload Downlink .................................................................................... 80

5.18

IOU - Input Overload Uplink......................................................................................... 80

5.19

LGO - User logged out from repeater ............................................................................ 80

5.20

PDL - Power Level BCCH Downlink............................................................................ 81

5.21

PSL - Power Supply Level............................................................................................. 81

5.22

PTM - Power Supply Temperature ................................................................................ 82

5.23

PW1 - Power Supply 1................................................................................................... 82

5.24

PW2 - Power Supply 2................................................................................................... 82

5.25

PW3 - Power Supply 3................................................................................................... 83

5.26

PW4 - Power Supply 4................................................................................................... 83

5.27

SZD - Synthesizer Downlink ......................................................................................... 84

5.28

SZU - Synthesizer Uplink .............................................................................................. 84

5.29

TEM - Temperature ....................................................................................................... 84

5.30

VLI - Valid Login to repeater ........................................................................................ 85

5.31

WRD - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink .......................................................... 85

Miscellaneous Command Attributes.............................................................................. 86 6.1

ACT ACK ...................................................................................................................... 86

6.2

ACT AIM....................................................................................................................... 86

6.3

ACT CLO....................................................................................................................... 87

6.4

ACT HBT....................................................................................................................... 87

6.5

ACT RCD ...................................................................................................................... 87

6.6

ACT RHW ..................................................................................................................... 87

© Avitec AB

February 2005

6 (102)


7

8

6.7

ACT RSR ....................................................................................................................... 87

6.8

ACT TRE ....................................................................................................................... 87

6.9

ACT UPA....................................................................................................................... 87

Commands ..................................................................................................................... 89 7.1

ACCESS MODEM ........................................................................................................ 89

7.2

CLEAR LOG ................................................................................................................. 89

7.3

CLEAR SCREEN .......................................................................................................... 89

7.4

HARDWARE ................................................................................................................ 89

7.5

HELP ............................................................................................................................. 90

7.6

LOG ............................................................................................................................... 90

7.7

LOGOUT ....................................................................................................................... 90

7.8

MODEM ........................................................................................................................ 90

7.9

MP.................................................................................................................................. 90

7.10

PERF.............................................................................................................................. 90

7.11

REINIT .......................................................................................................................... 90

7.12

SILENT ON SILENT OFF ............................................................................................ 90

7.13

STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 91

7.14

SYSTEM........................................................................................................................ 91

7.15

TRACE AMP................................................................................................................. 91

7.16

TRACE TRAFFIC ......................................................................................................... 91

Heartbeat Format ........................................................................................................... 93 8.1

Heartbeat Format in conventional 2-channel Repeaters................................................. 93

8.2

Heartbeat Format in 2-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters ................................................... 94

8.3

Heartbeat Format in 2-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters ................................ 95

8.4

Heartbeat Format in conventional 4-channel Repeaters................................................. 96

8.5

Heartbeat Format in 4-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters ................................ 98

8.6

Heartbeat Format in 4-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters ................................................. 100

© Avitec AB

February 2005

7 (102)


1 Introduction This document gives an overview of all available commands and attributes for Avitec AB EDGE/GSM repeaters. Commands and attributes described applies to conventional, frequency shifting and fiber optic fed repeaters in both 2-channel, 4-channel versions in 850, 900, 1800 and 1900 frequency range. Note! The commands and attributes apply to controller software version 1.04.

2 Repeater Naming Conventions Avitec manufactures numerous different repeater types in the EDGE/GSM series for four different frequency bands; GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. For detailed information about the different repeater types, please refer to main section of the manual. In the following sections these naming conventions apply: Conventional Repeater – This is a standard repeater, meaning that the repeater contains a donor and a server antenna, and that the channels picked up on the donor antenna is amplified and retransmitted out the server antenna. Of course the signals picked up by the server antenna in the repeater coverage area is amplified and retransmitted towards the base station on the donor antenna. Conventional repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4-channel versions, meaning that a maximum of 2 or 4 channels can be repeated. Frequency Shifting repeaters – A frequency shifting repeater consists of two units; the Donor and the Remote unit. The donor unit is mounted at the base station, and is fed via couplers from the base station antenna.. The base station channels are translated to a new channel, the link channel. This link channel is transmitted out the link antenna to the remote unit. At the Remote unit, the link channel is picked up by the link antenna and translated back to the original channels which are transmitted out on the Server antenna. Frequency shifting repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4-channel version. Frequency Translating repeaters – this is the same as a Frequency Shifting repeater. Band Shifting repeaters – This is a special case of the frequency shifting repeaters where the link is on another frequency band than the repeated frequencies. An example is the CSFT91822, where the repeater repeats GSM900 frequencies, while the link between the donor and the remote units are on the DCS1800 bands. Band shifting repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4-channel versions. Fiber Optic Fed repeaters – These repeater types consists of a HUB unit mounted at the base station. The HUB unit converts the radio signals from the base station to fiber optic signals. At the repeater site, the fiber optic signals are converted back to radio signals, amplified and transmitted out the server antenna. Fiber Optic repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4 channel versions.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

8 (102)


3 GET and SET-Attributes This section describes all the parameters and alarms that can be GET (read) or SET (written) to the control module. 3.1

ADD - SMS Address Access List

Attribute type: Read and Write When SMS is used for communication, addresses 1 to 4 indicates addresses that are allowed to read and write attributes from the controller. All addresses have read access to the controller, but only address one and two can set parameters and perform ACT commands. Reply format: 1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W

X is address 1, Y address 2, Z address 3 and W is address 4. If no address is available, a ‘-‘(dash) will be replied. Example: GET ADD

Reply: 1 +46705511125 2 – 3 +46705521334 4 –

Example: SET ADD 3 +46705511125

Configures address number three to be +46705511125 When data call communication is used, this attribute is obsolete. 3.2

ADC - Active Devices Count

Attribute type: Read only This attribute replies with number of installed active devices to the controller. Format: N

N represents the number of devices. Example: GET ADC

Reply: 5

meaning that the number of active devices is 5. 3.3

AIC - Antenna Isolation Measurement Channels

Attribute type: Read and Write The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain timepoint of the day (configured using attributes AIE and AIT). If antenna isolation is too low (as configured with attribute ALA AIM), an alarm is triggered. For details about the antenna measurement, please refer to attribute ACT AIM in section “Miscellaneous Command Attributes” The antenna isolation is measured using the BCCH downlink and a second listener channel. By default, downlink chain 1 and 2 settings are used for the antenna measurements. If only one chain is enabled in the repeater, or if measurement should be done on other channels, this attribute can be used to configure the alternate channels. Format:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

9 (102)


X Y

X is the BCCH channel, and Y is the second channel used in the measurements. If configured to 0, same as configured in CHA 1 and 2 is used. Example: GET AIC

Reply: 0 122

means that BCCH channel used is the one used in chain 1, but the listener channel is 122. Example: SET AIC 46 51

configures the BCCH used during measurements to 46, and listener channel to 51. Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822 etc). 3.4

AIE - Antenna Isolation Measurement Enabled

Attribute type: Read and Write The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain timepoint of the day (configured using attributes AIE and AIT). If antenna isolation is too low (as configured with attribute ALA AIM), an alarm is triggered. For details about the antenna measurement, please refer to attribute ACT AIM in section “Miscellaneous Command Attributes” This attribute configures if the automatic measurement should be enabled or not. Format: X

X = 0 means measurement of antenna isolation is disabled and X = 1 means measurement of antenna isolation is enabled. Example: GET AIE

Reply: 1

means that the repeater will measure the antenna isolation once per day. Example: SET AIE 0

disables the measurement. Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822 etc). 3.5

AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurement Status

Attribute type: Read only The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain time point of the day (configured using attributes AIE and AIT). If antenna isolation is too low (as configured with attribute ALA AIM), an alarm is triggered. For details about the antenna measurement, please refer to attribute ACT AIM in “Miscellaneous Command Attributes” This attribute replies with the status of last antenna measurement. Format: X

X = 0 means OK. X = 1 means antenna isolation is too low, or a failure was encountered (failure cause can be read out with attribute LAR) during measurement of the antenna isolation.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

10 (102)


Example: GET AIM

Reply: 1

meaning that last antenna measurement detected that the antenna isolation was too low, or the measurement failed. Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822 etc). 3.6

AIP - Antenna Isolation Measurement Progress

Attribute type: Read only The repeater can perform a measurement of the antenna isolation, either at scheduled timepoints, or upon user request by entering the command ACT AIM (for details about the antenna measurement, please refer to attribute ACT AIM in “Miscellaneous Command Attributes”). Once the antenna isolation measurement is requested, polling the AIP detects when antenna isolation measurement is completed. This attribute replies with the progress of current antenna isolation routine. Format: X

X = 0 means measurements are completed, and X = 1 means antenna isolation measurement is in progress Example: GET AIP

Reply: 1

meaning that antenna isolation measurement is in progress. Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822 etc). 3.7

AIT - Antenna Isolation Measurement Timepoint

Attribute type: Read and Write The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain timepoint of the day (configured using attributes AIE and AIT). If antenna isolation is too low (as configured with attribute ALA AIM), an alarm is triggered. For details about the antenna measurement, please refer to attribute ACT AIM in section “Miscellaneous Command Attributes” This attribute configures at what timepoint of the day the antenna isolation measurement should be performed. Format: HHMMSS

HH is the hours (in 24 hour notation), MM is minutes and SS is seconds specifying the measurement timepoint. Example: GET AIT

Reply: 031500

meaning that antenna measurement timepoint is 15 minutes past three in the morning. Example: SET AIT 170000

sets the time for measurement to 17 in the afternoon.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

11 (102)


Note 1! Since antenna measurement might cause dropped calls (radio parameters are changed for 3-4 seconds), it is recommended to set the antenna measurement to be performed during low traffic intervals. Note 2! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822 etc). 3.8

AL1 - Compressed Alarm Format

Attribute type: Read only This is a compact message of the alarm configuration strings. This attribute replies with the configuration of the alarm sources AMU, AMD, BAT, PDL and WRD The use of the attribute is mainly to increase the speed of repeater installations into the repeater OMC. Example: GET AL1

Replies: 0 0 1 006 003 003 0 0 1 006 003 003 0 0 1 90 115 3 0 0 2 0 0 3 012 000 003 0 0 2 013 000 003

which are the alarm configuration strings received as if using the commands GET GET GET GET GET

ALA ALA ALA ALA ALA

AMU AMD BAT PDL WRD

For a detailed description of the different alarm attributes and alarm strings, please refer to attribute ALA and section Alarm Attribute Configuration. 3.9


Attribute type: Read only Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources TEM, DOO, PW1, PW2 and PW3 3.10


Attribute type: Read only Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources EX1, EX2, EX3, EX4 and PW4 3.11


Attribute type: Read only Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources VLI, LGO, CLR and ILI 3.12


Attribute type: Read only Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources SZU, SZD, PSL, PTM, AIM 3.13


Attribute type: Read only Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources IOU, IOD, ASU, ASD, COM 3.14


Attribute type: Read only

© Avitec AB

February 2005

12 (102)


Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources FRX, FTX. Note! This attribute is only used in fiber optic fed repeaters. 3.15

ALA - Alarm Configuration Settings

Attribute type: Read and Write Format: AAA X Y Z LLL UUU TTT

AAA is the alarm source to configure. Please refer to “Alarm Attribute Configuration” for an overview of available alarm parameters to configure. X has double functionality. It determines whether an alarm should be send if error is detected, and it also configures whether the alarm relay should be affected by the alarm source. X = 0 means alarm transmission enabled, but alarm doesn’t affect the relay output X = 1 means alarm transmission disabled, and does not affect the relay. X = 2 means alarm transmission is enabled, and alarm affects the relay output. X = 3 means alarm transmission is disabled, but alarm affects relay output Y determines whether an alarm requires to be acknowledged or not. (When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged when the repeater has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the main address. The alarms can also be acknowledged with the command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely. If an alarm is not acknowledged, it will be retransmitted up to MNR (maximum number of retransmissions) times, with RCA (repetition cycle for alarms) minute’s interval. Refer to attributes MNR and RCA.) Y = 0 means Acknowledge required Y = 1 means No acknowledge required Z is a threshold indicator, indicating how thresholds are used for this particular alarm source. Z = 1 means that both thresholds are used for alarm calculation. Z = 2 means that lower threshold is used Z = 3 means that upper threshold is used Z = 4 means that thresholds are ignored, i.e. digital measurement. Note! Changing parameter Z does NOT affect the measurement of the alarm source. Z is just an indicator of how the measurement is done, and should NEVER be changed. LLL is the value of the lower threshold used for alarm calculation. UUU is the value of the upper threshold used for alarm calculation. TTT is the time an alarm has to be in erroneous state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA TEM

Returns: 0 0 1 -15 060 5

This means that alarm is enabled and acknowledge required. Both thresholds are used in measuring the alarm, lower threshold is -15 (degrees), 60 (degrees) is the upper threshold and that the temperature has to be higher than 60 for 5 seconds before an alarm is triggered. Example: SET ALA TEM 0 0 1 0 60 20

Modifies the above alarm source to generate an alarm when the temperature has been above 60 degrees or below 0 degrees for more than 20 seconds. 3.16

ALL - Compact Message for Getting Status and RF Parameters from Repeater

Attribute type: Read only This attribute replies with the same information as in the heartbeat sent to the Avitec Element Manager, except the Time and Date information. Please refer to section Heartbeat Reports.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

13 (102)


3.17

ALV - Analog Levels

Attribute type: Read only Returns the snapshot information about the main analog levels in the repeater unit. Depending on the number of channels in the repeater, the reply varies. 2-channel repeaters:

is the +28 V power supply level out from the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +15 V power supply level out from the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +6.45 V power supply level out from the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +6.45 V power supply level from the Power Supply to the Controller. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +10.5 V (when fully charged) power supply level feeding the controller in case of a power failure. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the control module. is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the mains voltage level in to the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. Example: GET ALV

Reply: +28.1 +15.0 +6.5 +6.4 +10.1 33 48 229

This displays the four different power levels +28.1 V, +15.0 V, +6.5 V, +6.4 V out from the Power Supply. Battery level is +10.1 V, Controller temperature is 33 °C, Power Supply temperature is 48 °C and mains input level to power supply is 229 V. 4-channel repeaters: 4-channel repeaters are equipped with two power supplies, the Master Power Supply, feeding 2 LIMPA’s, Reference Generator, FDM’s and the controller, and also the Slave Power Supply, feeding the 2 remaining LIMPA’s. Format:

is the +28 V power supply level out from the Master Power Supply. If communication with master power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +28 V power supply level out from the Slave Power Supply. If communication with slave power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +15 V power supply level out from the Master Power Supply. If communication with master power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +15 V power supply level out from the Slave Power Supply. If communication with slave power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +6.45 V power supply level out from the Master Power Supply. If communication with master power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +6.45 V power supply level out from the Slave Power Supply. If communication with slave power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the +6.45 V power supply level from the Master Power Supply to the Controller. If communication with master power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

14 (102)


is the +10.5 V (when fully charged) power supply level feeding the controller in case of a power failure. If communication with master power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the control module. is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the Master Power Supply. If communication with master power supply in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the Slave Power Supply. If communication with slave power supply in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. is the mains voltage level in to the Power Supplies. If communication with master power supply is in error, a dash (‘-‘) is reported. Example: GET ALV

Reply: +28.1 +28.0 +15.0 +15.0 +6.5 +6.5 +6.4 +10.1 33 48 45 229

This displays the eight different power levels +28.1 V, +28.0, +15.0 V, +15.0, +6.5 V, +6.5 V, +6.4 V out from the Power Supply. Battery level is +10.1 V, Controller temperature is 33 °C, Master Power Supply temperature is 48 °C, Slave Power Supply temperature is 45 °C, and mains input level to power supply is 229 V. Note! To read out full power levels in all modules, please refer to attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution) 3.18

AMD - Status of Amplifier Chain Downlink

Attribute type: Read only This parameter returns the status of the amplifier chains in the downlink path. Each LIMPA contains two chains, and the reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPA’s. Format for 2 channel repeaters: XY

X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) 0 indicates an OK, and 1 an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with LIMPA is in error. Example: 01

means amplifier chain 1 DL is OK, while there is an error in chain 2 DL. Format for 4 channel repeaters: XYZW

X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1). Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1). Z is status of Amplifier Chain 3 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2). W is status of Amplifier Chain 4 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2). 0 indicates an OK, and 1 an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with corresponding LIMPA is in error. Example: 0001

means an Error in chain 4 DL, while all other chains are OK. 3.19

AMU - Status of Amplifier Chain Uplink

Attribute type: Read only This parameter returns the status of the amplifier chains in the uplink path. Each LIMPA contains two chains, and the reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPA’s. Format for 2 channel repeaters:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

15 (102)


XY

X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1) 0 indicates an OK, and 1 an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with LIMPA is in error. Example: 01

means amplifier chain 1 UL is OK, while there is an error in chain 2 UL. Format for 4 channel repeaters: XYZW

X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Z is status of Amplifier Chain 3 UL (in downlink LIMPA 2) W is status of Amplifier Chain 4 UL (in downlink LIMPA 2) 0 indicates an OK, and 1 an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with corresponding LIMPA is in error. Example: 00--

means an that chains 1 and 2 are OK, while there is an error in communication with LIMPA 2 (containing uplink chains 3 and 4). 3.20

ASC - Telephone Number to OMC, or Address of SMSC

Attribute type: Read and Write When data call is used, ASC is the telephone number to the OMC. In case of SMS communication, this is the number to the Short Message Service Center (SMSC). Example: GET ASC

Reply: +46705008999

means, if SMS is enabled, that this is the address to the Short Message Service Center. If data call is used, the controller will dial this number if an alarm occurs, or a report is to be sent. The controller can optionally call a secondary OMC address in case message is undeliverable to the ASC address. Please refer to attribute SSC attribute for details. Example: SET ASC 90510

sets the address to 90510. Note! If data call is used as communications method, setting the address to nothing will disable the sending of alarms to the OMC, while the controller is still available for remote login. Example: SET ASC

Disables the sending of alarms and reports (if data call is used) 3.21

ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink Status

Attribute type: Read only The Amplifier Chain Saturation detects if the repeater works in the optimum way. If the input signal to the repeater is too high, the amplifiers will go into saturation, and hence the repeater will not work within the optimum range. Note! Having a chain going well into saturation might indicate that the repeater is oscillating. In this case, the gain must be decreased in order to avoid severe signal pollution. Also, the antenna isolation should be verified. Please refer to command ACT AIM for details on how to measure the antenna isolation.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

16 (102)


Format for 2-channel repeaters: XY

X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 1 Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 2 where 0 indicates an OK 1 indicates an Error. - (dash) means connection with LIMPA is in error. Example: GET ASD

Reply: 10

meaning that the gain in downlink 1 is in error, and downlink chain 2 is OK. Format for 4-channel repeaters: XYZW

X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 1 Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 2 Z is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 3 W is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 4 where 0 indicates an OK 1 indicates an Error. - (dash) means connection with corresponding LIMPA is in error. Example: GET ASD

Reply: 0001

meaning that the saturation in downlink chain 4 is in error. In this example, it might be that chain 4 is oscillating, and hence the gain should be decreased and / or antenna isolation verified. Note! To read out actual level of saturation on a chain by chain basis, refer to attribute ASL. 3.22

ASL - Amplifier Chain Saturation Level

Attribute type: Read only The Amplifier Chain Saturation Level displays the amplifier saturation level on a chain by chain basis. Format for 2-channel repeaters: KLXY

K is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 1 L is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 2 X is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 1 Y is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 2 K, L, X, Y can have the following values 0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal ). 1 means amplifier is working in the optimum range. 2 means amplifier is going into saturation and that gain should be decreased. 3 means amplifier is well into saturation, and that gain must be decreased to avoid degradation of signal quality. - (dash) means connection with LIMPA is in error. Example: GET ASL

Reply: 3310

© Avitec AB

February 2005

17 (102)


meaning that the uplink amplifier chains are going very hard into saturation, while downlink one works in optimum range. This probably indicates that the repeater is oscillating in the uplink, and that the gain in the uplink should be decreased. Format for 4-channel repeaters: KLMNXYZW

K is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 1 L is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 2 M is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 3 N is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 4 X is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 1 Y is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 2 Z is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 3 W is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 4 K-M, X-W can have the following values 0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal). 1 means amplifier is working in the optimum range. 2 means amplifier is going into saturation and that gain should be decreased. 3 means amplifier is well into saturation, and that gain must be decreased to avoid degradation of signal quality. - (dash) means connection with corresponding LIMPA is in error. Example: GET ASL

Reply: 00011003

meaning that uplink channel 4 works in optimum range (probably traffic going through the chain), downlink chain one is working in optimum range (BCCH properly configured) and that downlink chain four is well into saturation. Downlink chain four should hence be decreased to avoid signal degradation. This can also be an indication that the downlink chain four is oscillating. 3.23

ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink Status

Attribute type: Read only The Amplifier Chain Saturation detects if the repeater works in the optimum way. If the input signal to the repeater is too high, the amplifiers will go into saturation, and hence the repeater will not work within the optimum range. Note 1! Having a chain going well into saturation might indicate that the repeater is oscillating. In this case, the gain must be decreased in order to avoid severe signal pollution. Also, the antenna isolation should be verified. Please refer to command ACT AIM for details on how to measure the antenna isolation. Note 2! A mobile phone being used very close to the server antenna might cause the amplifier saturation alarm to be activated. Format for 2-channel repeaters: XY

X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 1 Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 2 where 0 indicates an OK 1 indicates an Error. - (dash) means connection with LIMPA is in error. Example: GET ASU

Reply: 11

© Avitec AB

February 2005

18 (102)


meaning that the uplink amplifier chains are in error. This probably indicates that the repeater is oscillating, and that the gain in the uplink must be decreased. Format for 4-channel repeaters: XYZW

X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 1 Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 2 Z is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 3 W is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 4 where 0 indicates an OK 1 indicates an Error - (dash) means connection with corresponding LIMPA is in error. Example: GET ASU

Reply: 1001

meaning that the amplifier chain in uplink one and uplink chain four is in error. In this example, it might be that chain one and four is oscillating, and hence the gain should be decreased and / or antenna isolation verified. Note! To read out actual level of saturation on a chain by chain basis, refer to attribute ASL. 3.24

ATD - Attenuation Downlink

Attribute type: Read and Write Format on setting parameter: SET ATD K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]

K is the chain selector, and X is the attenuation in downlink chain K. Optionally attenuation in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command. The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-channel repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel repeaters. The attenuation is settable in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB. Example: SET ATD 2 21

Sets attenuation in downlink chain 2 to 21 dB. Example: SET ATD 3 20 4 22

Sets attenuation in downlink chain 3 to 20 dB and in chain 4 to 22 dB. Format on getting: GET ATD

Reply in 2 channel repeaters: 1 XX 2 YY

XX is attenuation in chain one downlink, YY attenuation in downlink 2. Reply in 4 channel repeaters: 1 XX 2 YY 3 ZZ 4 WW

XX is attenuation in chain 1 downlink, YY attenuation in downlink 2, ZZ attenuation in downlink 3 and WW in downlink 4. Example: GET ATD

Reply: 1 22 2 22 3 22 4 23

means that attenuation in downlink 1 to 3 is 22 dB, while channel 4 is set to 23 dB attenuation.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

19 (102)


3.25

ATU - Attenuation Uplink

Attribute type: Read and Write Format on setting parameter: SET ATU K X [L Y] [M Z] [N WW]

K is the chain selector, and X is the attenuation in uplink chain K. Optionally attenuation in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command. The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-channel repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel repeaters. The attenuation is settable in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB. Example: SET ATU 2 7

Sets attenuation in uplink chain 2 to 7 dB. Example: SET ATU 2 11 3 11

Sets attenuation in uplink chains 2 and 3 to 11 dB. Format on getting parameters: GET ATU

Reply in 2 channel repeaters: 1 XX 2 YY

XX is attenuation in chain 1 uplink, YY attenuation in uplink 2. Reply in 4 channel repeaters: 1 XX 2 YY 3 ZZ 4 WW

XX is attenuation in chain one uplink, YY attenuation in uplink 2, ZZ attenuation in uplink 3 and WW in uplink 4. Example: GET ATU

Reply: 1 24 2 24 3 24 4 24

means that attenuation in downlink 1 to 4 is 24 dB. 3.26

BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment

Attribute type: Read only Reports the status of the battery charge for the remote communications equipment. Format: X

X = 0 means charge is OK X = 1 means charge is ERROR. X = ‘-‘ means there is a communications error between the controller and the Master Power Supply. Example: GET BAT

Replies: 1

meaning that there is an error in the charging of the battery for the remote communications equipment 3.27

CFG - Compact message to receive repeater configuration

Attribute type: Read only This attribute is used to receive some of the most common repeater configuration parameters. The reply is a list of parameters, separated by space. The attributes return the values of the GET attributes (in order):

© Avitec AB

February 2005

20 (102)


MSG LMT ILA MAR MGA CHL PRF TPD

Example: GET CFG

Returns: 1 00070 2 00062 3 00000 4 00000 20 50 003 85 736 811 1 020000

3.28

CHA - Channel Configuration

Attribute type: Read and Write This attribute is used to configure and determine the repeated channels. Format on setting channel: SET CHA K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]

Where K is the chain selector, and X is the repeated channel in chain K (both uplink and downlink). Depending on repeater the chain selector is 1 or 2 (2-channel repeaters) or 1 to 4 (4-channel repeaters ). Optionally channels in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command. Channel must be within the interval that the repeater can handle. Channel limits can be determined by using attribute CHL. Example: SET CHA 2 64

Sets channel in uplink and downlink chain 2 to 64. Example: SET CHA 1 562 3 570

Sets channel one to 562 and 2 to 570. Format on getting parameters in 2 channel repeaters: GET CHA

Replies: 1 X 2 Y

X is channel 1, Y is channel 2 Example: GET CHA

Reply: 1 47 2 11

means that channel in chain 1 is 47 and chain 2 is set to 11. Format on getting parameters in 4-channel repeaters: GET CHA

Replies: 1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W

X is channel 1, Y is channel 2, Z is channel 3 and W is channel 4. Example: GET CHA

Reply: 1 610 2 615 3 630 4 637

means that channel in chain 1 is 610, chain 2 is set to 615, 3 is set to 630 and channel four is set to 637.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

21 (102)


3.29

CHL - Channel Limits

Attribute type: Read only Format on Non-Band Shifting repeaters: X Y

X is lowest, and Y highest available channel that the repeater can repeat Example: GET CHL

Reply: 1 124

Indicates that the repeater can handle channel numbers 1 through 124 Note! Repeaters handling the GSM-R or E-GSM band might have first value higher than second value. For example, an E-GSM repeater might have the channel range 975-124. This means that the valid channel numbers are 975-1023 and 0-124. Format on Band Shifting repeaters: X Y Z W

X is lowest, and Y highest available channel that the repeater can repeat, and Z, W is the range for the link channels. Example: GET CHL

Reply: 1 124 740 810

indicates that the repeater can handle channel numbers 1 through 124, and that allowed link channels are 740 to 810. Note! Repeaters handling the GSM-R or E-GSM band might have first value higher than second value. For example, an E-GSM repeater might have the channel range 975-124. This means that the valid channel numbers are 975-1023 and 0-124. 3.30

COM - Status of Communication Between Controller and Hardware Devices

Attribute type: Read only The control module communicates with a number of hardware devices in the repeater over a serial bus. This attribute is used to determine the status of the communication between the control module and the different modules. Note! If Reference Generator is broken, this will lead to communications alarm with the Reference Generator itself, and also with the LIMPA’s, since their microcontrollers run from the Reference Generator clock. Depending on repeater type, the format varies: Format for 2 channel conventional and Frequency Translating –IR, -SD and - DD repeaters: XYZWK

X Y Z W K

= = = = =

Status of communication with Power Supply Status of communication with LIMPA UL Status of communication with LIMPA DL Status of communication with Reference Generator Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server side.

0 means OK 1 means Error Example: GET COM

Reply: 00100

© Avitec AB

February 2005

22 (102)


means that communication between all modules are working properly , except for communication between controller and LIMPA DL. Format for 2-channel Fiber Optic fed repeaters: XYZWKL

X Y Z W K L

= = = = = =

Status of communication with Power Supply Status of communication with LIMPA UL Status of communication with LIMPA DL Status of communication with Reference Generator Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server side. Status of communication with Fiber Optic Interface.


Reply: 001000

means that communication between all modules are working properly , except for communication between controller and LIMPA DL. Format for 2-channel Frequency Translating –ER repeaters: XYZWKL

X Y Z W K L

= = = = = =

Status of communication with Power Supply Status of communication with LIMPA UL Status of communication with LIMPA DL Status of communication with Reference Generator Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server antenna port 1 Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server antenna port 2


Reply: 0000010

means that communication between all modules are working properly , except for communication between controller and Filtering And Distribution module on server antenna 1. Format for 4-channel and Frequency Translating –IR, -SD and - DD repeaters XYZWJKLM

X = Y = Z = W = J = K = L = M =

Status of communication with Master Power Supply Status of communication with Slave Power Supply Status of communication with LIMPA UL 1 Status of communication with LIMPA UL 2 Status of communication with LIMPA DL 1 Status of communication with LIMPA DL 2 Status of communication with Reference Generator Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server side.


Reply: 00010000

means that communication between all modules are working properly , except for communication between controller and LIMPA UL 2. Format for 4-channel Frequency Translating –ER repeaters:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

23 (102)


XYZWJKLM

X = Y = Z = W = J = K = L = M = N =

Status of communication with Master Power Supply Status of communication with Slave Power Supply Status of communication with LIMPA UL 1 Status of communication with LIMPA UL 2 Status of communication with LIMPA DL 1 Status of communication with LIMPA DL 2 Status of communication with Reference Generator Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server antenna port 1 Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server antenna port 2


Reply: 000100000

means that communication between all modules are working properly , except for communication between controller and LIMPA UL 2. Format for 4-channel Fiber Optic fed repeaters: XYZWJKLMN

X = Y = Z = W = J = K = L = M = N =

Status of communication with Master Power Supply Status of communication with Slave Power Supply Status of communication with LIMPA UL 1 Status of communication with LIMPA UL 2 Status of communication with LIMPA DL 1 Status of communication with LIMPA DL 2 Status of communication with Reference Generator Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server side. Status of communication with Fiber Optic Interface.


Reply: 000100000

means that communication between all modules are working properly , except for communication between controller and LIMPA UL 2. 3.31

DAT - Date

Attribute type: Read and Write Format: DDMMYY

DD=Date, MM=Month, YY=Year Example: GET DAT

Replies: 181099

means the repeater date is set to 18’th of October, 1999 Example: SET DAT 241200

sets the repeater date to 24’th of December year 2000.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

24 (102)


Note! When changing the date, a heartbeat will be sent as soon as user logs out, the traffic / uplink activity log will be cleared, and all alarms in the log will have the number of retransmissions of non-acknowledged alarms set to the value MNR. 3.32

DDI - Detailed Device Information

Attribute type: Read only Format: GET DDI

is a number from 1 to max number of attributes (as read out by ADC attribute). Format on Reply:

is the Serial Number of the device is Article Number / Hardware Revision is a string delimited by “ (double quote) signs, containing software version of the device is a string delimited by “(double quote) signs, containing software build time is a string delimited by “(double quote) signs, software build date is a string delimited by “(double quote) signs, containing manufacturing specific information. If no information is available, a ‘-‘is reported. contains the repeater initialization time on the format HHMMSS, with 24 hours notation. If no information is available, a ‘-‘(dash) is reported. contains the repeater initialization date on the format DDMMYY. If no information is available, a ‘-‘(dash) is reported. shows how many seconds the device has been up and running since last reset shows how many times the device has been started since device was initialized shows how many times the watchdog has forced the device to reset since device initialization is a string delimited by “(double quote) signs, containing a textual description of the hardware device. 3.33

DEV - Sets the Different Communications Methods

Attribute type: Read and Write Options: SMS = Short Message Services DTC = Data Call NUL = No remote access enabled In order to use SMS, modem type must be set to Wavecom (external modem, SET MTP WAVECOM), Integra (on board modem, SET MTP INTEGRA) or TrioRail (external modem, SET MTP TRIOEXT ). Example: SET DEV SMS

Enables the repeater for remote access via SMS. Note 1! This requires that the address of the SMS center be configured (SET ASC X, where X is SMSC address). Also, at least one of the addresses must be configured (SET ADD X Y) and the main address must point at one of the configured addresses (SET MAD X), otherwise, the controller will not be accessible SMS. Note 2! An SMS configured repeater will, if modem is initialized correctly, still be remotely accessible via modem connection ( Data Call ).

© Avitec AB

February 2005

25 (102)


Note 3! TrioRail external modem is only supported in GSM-R (railway) repeaters. 3.34

DOO - Door Status

Attribute type: Read only Format: X

X = 0 means door is closed X = 1 means door is open Example: GET DOO

Replies: 1

meaning that door is open 3.35

EAC - External Alarm Configuration

Attribute type: Read and Write The External Alarm Configuration is used in conjunction with the EAD attribute to configure what additional text is transmitted together with alarms EX1-EX4. Format on getting parameter: GET EAC

Replies: XYZW

where X is configuration for EX1 Y is configuration for EX2 Z is configuration for EX3 W is configuration for EX4 X, Y, Z, W = 0 means that default text will be attached to alarms EX1-EX4, and X, Y, Z, W = 1 means that text entered in corresponding External Alarm Description will be attached to the alarm message transmitted to the repeater OMC. Example: GET EAC

Replies: 0010

means that default alarm message is used in external alarm 1,2 and 4, while external alarm three will have text as configured with SET EAD 3 attached to the alarm message. Format on setting parameter: SET EAC XYZW

where X, Y, Z, W configures the usage for alarm description for external pin 1,2, 3 or 4. Example: SET EAC 1100

configures EX1 and EX2 to attach alarm description as configured with SET EAD to the alarms transmitted to the repeater OMC. 3.36

EAD - External Alarm Description

Attribute type: Read and Write The External Alarm Description allows for giving each external alarm input a unique tag. This allows for easier information about what is connected to each alarm input. Optionally (as configured using attribute EAC), this tag can be included in the additional text field for the alarms transmitted to the repeater OMC. Format on getting parameter:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

26 (102)


GET EAD X

where X indicates the alarm description for external pin 1,2, 3 or 4. Example: GET EAD 3

Replies: UPS POWER FAILURE

meaning that external alarm 3 description is “UPS POWER FAILURE”. Format on setting parameter: SET EAD X [Alarm Pin Description]

where X indicates the alarm description for external pin 1,2, 3 or 4. [Alarm Pin Description] is the actual description for this alarm source. Maximum length of string is 19 characters including any spaces. Example: SET EAD 4 RADIO HUT DOOR

sets the alarm description for external alarm pin 4 to RADIO HUT DOOR. Note! All characters will be converted to upper case. Furthermore, the controller will remove any extra spaces between words, ensuring that only one space separates each word in the alarm pin description. 3.37

EX1 - External Alarm 1


X=0 means status is OK X=1 means status is ERROR Example: GET EX1

Replies: 0

meaning status is OK. 3.38



X=0 means status is OK X=1 means status is ERROR Example: GET EX2

Replies: 1

meaning status is ERROR. 3.39



X=0 means status is OK X=1 means status is ERROR

© Avitec AB

February 2005

27 (102)


Example: GET EX3

Replies: 0

meaning status is OK. 3.40



X=0 means status is OK X=1 means status is ERROR. Example: GET EX4

Replies: 1

meaning status is ERROR. 3.41

EXT - Configuration of External Alarms

Attribute type: Read and Write Format: X Y Z W

X is configuration for alarm pin 1 Y is configuration for alarm pin 2 Z is configuration for alarm pin 3 W is configuration for alarm pin 4 0 means that no voltage is the OK state, i.e. a voltage applied to the pin generates an alarm 1 means that applied voltage is the OK state, i.e. absence of voltage generates an alarm Note! If the pin is not used for alarm input, the configuration should be ‘0’. Example: GET EXT

Replies: 0 0 1 0

means that pin 3 normally should have a voltage applied, and that the other pins either normally should NOT have a voltage applied, or are not in use. Example: SET EXT 0 0 1 1

Configures alarm pins 1 and 2 to report OK if no voltage is available, and pin 3 and 4 to require a voltage applied in order to be in OK state. 3.42

FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver Status

Attribute type: Read only Returns the status of the fiber optic receiver. An error might indicate that the fiber from the HUB unit is failing or that the HUB unit is experiencing a power failure. Format: X

X = 0 means receiver status is OK X = 1 means receiver has an ERROR detected. If there is a communications error with fiber optic module, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

28 (102)


Example: GET FRX

Replies: 1

meaning that something is wrong in the fiber optic receiver. Note! This attribute only applies to Fiber Optic fed repeaters. 3.43

FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter Status

Attribute type: Read only Returns the status of the fiber optic transmitter. A fiber optic transmitter most likely indicates that there is something wrong with the fiber optic unit. Format: X

X = 0 means transmitter status is OK X = 1 means transmitter has an ERROR detected. If there is a communications error with fiber optic module, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. Example: GET FTX

Replies: 1

meaning that something is wrong in the fiber optic transmitter. Note! This attribute only applies to Fiber Optic fed repeaters. 3.44

HDC - Hardware Device Count

Attribute type: Read only Returns number of configured hardware devices in the repeater. Format: X

Example: GET HDC

Replies: 12

meaning that there are 12 hardware devices configured in the system. Please refer to attribute HDI on how to retrieve information about the different devices. 3.45

HDI - Hardware Device Information

Attribute type: Read only This command returns device information about a specific device. GET HDI X

X is from 1 to HDC. Reply:

is 4 characters containing the device serial number. is the Avitec Article Number, up to 12 characters. contains a quoted textual description of the hardware device. String can be up to 40 characters wide. Example: GET HDI 1

© Avitec AB

February 2005

29 (102)


Reply: 4711 H311001A "Control Module"

If Device Number X doesn't exist, a dash '-' is replied. Example: GET HDI 4000

Reply: -

3.46

HWV - Hardware Version

Attribute type: Read only Returns a string with the hardware version of the control module. Example: GET HWV

Replies: H121001C

meaning that the controller version is H121001C. 3.47

ILA - Invalid Login Attempts

Attribute type: Read and Write Format: X

X is the number of invalid login attempts that can be made before the login is locked for login. Every time an erroneous login attempt is made to the repeater, a counter is increased. This counter is decreased with one every hour. If the counter exceeds the ILA value, the login will be blocked for one hour. After that one more login attempt is allowed. Example: GET ILA

Replies: 8

meaning that 8 erroneous login attempts can be made before login is blocked. Example: SET ILA 5

Modifies this value to 5. 3.48

IOD - Input Overload Downlink Status

Attribute type: Read only The input circuitry in the downlink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the downlink chain. The measurement is always measured in downlink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector, covering the entire repeater band where the repeater is operational. This attribute can be used to see if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. This can for example be a base station from another operator being mounted too close to the repeater donor antenna. Format: X

X = 0 means that the input in the downlink is OK X = 1 means that there is a strong input signal in the downlink, causing the input to be blocked. Example: GET IOD

© Avitec AB

February 2005

30 (102)


Replies: 1

meaning that a radio source is injecting a strong signal in the downlink path, causing the repeater performance to be decreased. Most likely, the antenna is facing a base station from another operator, the repeater is mounted too close to the base station or the antenna has too much gain, causing the repeater input to be blocked. Note! It is very unlikely that an IOD alarm is triggered in a Fiber Optic fed repeater, since the RF-levels out from the FiberOptic interface is much lower than the triggered value for the IOD alarm. An IOD alarm triggered in a Fiber Optic fed repeater probably indicates an internal failure in the input stage of the LIMPA. 3.49

IOU - Input Overload Uplink Status

Attribute type: Read only The input circuitry in the uplink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the uplink chain. The measurement is always measured in uplink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector, covering the entire repeater band where the repeater is operational. This attribute can be used to see if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. Format: X

X = 0 means that the input in the uplink is OK and X = 1 means that there is a strong input signal in the uplink, causing the input to be blocked. Example: GET IOU

Replies: 1

meaning that a radio source is injecting a strong signal in the uplink path, causing the repeater performance to be decreased. If the repeater stays in this stage for a long time, a visit to the site is necessary, in order to find the cause for the alarm. 3.50

IPL - Input Level

Attribute type: Read only Displays the maximum input power of the last sampled frame. The input power is continuously sampled, and the highest value each second is saved in the controller on a chain by chain basis. Reply format in 2-channel repeaters: X Y Z W

where value is input level in dBm X is input level in chain 1 UL Y is input level in chain 2 UL Z is input level in chain 1 DL W is input level in chain 2 DL If a value is below lowest detectable value, '-110' is reported Example: GET IPL

Reply: –110 -77 -59 -110

This means chain 1 UL is lower than lowest detectable, Uplink 2 has –77 dBm, chain 1 DL has –59 dBm and chain 2 DL is lower than lowest detectable level. Reply format in 4-channel repeaters:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

31 (102)


X Y Z W K L M N

where value is input level in dBm X is input level in chain 1 UL Y is input level in chain 2 UL Z is input level in chain 3 UL W is input level in chain 4 UL K is input level in chain 1 DL L is input level in chain 2 DL M is input level in chain 3 DL N is input level in chain 4 DL. If a value is below lowest detectable level, '-110' is reported Example: GET IPL

Reply: –82 -56 -110 -110 -66 -110 -110 -110

This means chain 1 UL has -82 dBm, chain 2 UL has -56 dBm, 1 DL has -66 dBm, and all other chain has input level lower than lowest detectable level. 3.51

LAI - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Level

Attribute type: Read only This attribute is used to read out the last antenna isolation measurement. The antenna isolation measurements can be configured to be scheduled on a certain time of the day (using the attribute AIT). Format:

If measure has never been done, a ‘-‘ (dash) is replied, otherwise determines the status of the last antenna isolation measurement, 0 is OK 1 is ERROR or ‘-‘ if last measurement for some reason failed (failure cause is read out with attribute LAR). displays the measured isolation in dB. If last measurement failed, a ‘-‘ is reported. displays the BCCH channel used during the measurements. displays the listener channel used during the measurements. displays timepoint when last measurement was performed. If no measurements have been performed, a ‘-‘ is reported. is the date when last measurement was performed. If no measurements have been performed, a ‘-‘ is reported. Example 1: GET LAI

Returns: - - 17 42 - -

means that no antenna measurement has been completed since system startup. Example 2: GET LAI

Returns: - - 17 42 020306 023000

means that last measurement was attempted at 02.30 AM the 2’nd March 2003, but that measurement failed. Failure cause should be read out with attribute LAR. Example 3: GET LAI

Returns: 1 73 17 42 020306 023000

© Avitec AB

February 2005

32 (102)


means that last measurement was completed at 02.30 AM the 2’nd March 2003, and measurement showed that antenna is 73 dBm, which in this case is too low, and considered an ERROR. Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822 etc). 3.52

LAR - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Reply

Attribute type: Read only This attribute is used to read out a reply string with additional information about last antenna isolation, including failure cause when failing to perform a measurement. Format:

is a quoted string, in clear. If no information is available, a ‘-‘ (dash) is replied. Example: GET LAR

Returns: “BCCH input on channel 42 too low.”

In this example, another BCCH channel might be required in order to perform the antenna isolation measurement successfully. Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822 etc). 3.53

LLN - Log Length


Where is the number of log entries in the alarm log. Example: GET LLN

Returns: 17

means that there are 17 alarms that can be read out from the alarm log, starting with log item 1. 3.54

LIT - Log Item

Attribute type: Read only Format: GET LIT M

Reads alarm log entry number M. Reply format: X Y N A S C K R B Text

X = Time on the format HHMMSS Y = Data on the format DDMMYY N = Message Number of Alarm Message 0 to 99999 A = Attribute Name SZU, SZD, AMU ……. Please refer to section Alarm Attribute Configuration for an overview of available alarm. S = Severity WA, CR, MI…. C = Class EN, EQ, CO K = Acknowledged 0 = No, 1 = Yes

© Avitec AB

February 2005

33 (102)


R = Number of Retransmissions B = Attribute i.e. 00, 1, 1100 Text = Additional information about the alarm entry within double quotes up to 45 characters long, for example “Current out level is +26 dBm”. This textual information applies to when the alarm occurred. Note! If no log entry exists in log, an empty string is replied. 3.55

LMT - Timeout in Minutes

Attribute type: Read and Write Format: X

If a logged in user does not perform any activity within LMT minutes, the control module will initiate an automatic logout. Example: GET LMT

Reply: 20

meaning that the user will be logged out after 20 minutes of inactivity. Example: SET LMT 15

Changes this time to 15 minutes. 3.56

LNK - Link Channel

Attribute type: Read and Write This parameter is used to configure the link channels used between Donor and Remote units. Format on setting link: SET LNK K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]

Where K is the chain selector, and X is the link channel in chain K (both uplink and downlink). Depending on repeater the chain selector is 1 or 2 (2-channel repeaters) or 1 to 4 (4-channel repeaters ). Optionally link channels in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command. Link channel must be within the interval that the repeater can handle. Link channel limits can be determined by using attribute CHL. Example: SET LNK 2 64

Sets link channel in uplink and downlink chain 2 to 64. Example: SET LNK 1 562 3 570

Sets link channel one to 562 and 2 to 570. Format on getting parameters in 2 channel repeaters: GET LNK

Replies: 1 X 2 Y

X is link channel 1, Y is link channel 2 Example: GET LNK

Reply: 1 47 2 11

means that link channel in chain 1 is 47 and chain 2 is set to 11. Format on getting parameters in 4-channel repeaters: GET LNK

© Avitec AB

February 2005

34 (102)



X is link channel 1, Y is link channel 2, Z is link channel 3 and W is link channel 4. Example: GET LNK

Reply: 1 610 2 615 3 630 4 637

means that link channel in chain 1 is 610, chain 2 is set to 615, 3 is set to 630 and link channel four is set to 637. Note! If changes are made to a Remote Unit via remote login over wireless modem, changing this parameter might cause the call to be dropped, since the Remote and Donor units get different link channels. If a frequency re-tuning of a repeater pair should be performed, first change the Remote link channels, then the Donor link channels. After that, change the Remote channels and finally the Donor channels. 3.57

LPC - Last Power Cycling of Modem

Attribute type: Read only The controller can be configured to automatically turn off and turn on the modem once per day. This feature can be used to ensure that the modem parameters when using for example GSM modems contain the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc. This attribute displays when last power cycling of the modem was performed. Format: HHMMSS DDMMYY

HHMMSS is the timepoint, with 24 hours notation, and DDMMYY is the date when last modem power cycling (more precisely last modem power ON) was performed. Example: GET LPC

Reply: 201300 110503

indicating that the modem was last power cycled on 11’th of May 2003 at 20:13. Attribute MPE is used to configure if automatic modem power cycling should be enabled. Timepoint for when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last modem Power Cycling timepoint, use attribute LPC. In order to perform an instant modem power cycling, please refer to attribute ACT RCD in section Miscellaneous Command Attributes 3.58

LVD - Peak Power Out level Downlink

Attribute type: Read and Write This attribute is used to control the peak power limiting in the downlink path. Format on setting peak power: SET LVD K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]

K is the chain selector, and X is the maximum peak power (outlevel) in the downlink chain before the ALC is activated. Optionally peak power in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command. The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel repeaters. Depending on repeater model, the different valid peak powers in dBm are: 2-channel conventional repeaters: 37, 34, 31, -100 4-channel conventional repeaters: 34, 31, 28, -100 2-channel Frequency Translating –ER units: 43, 40, 37, -100 2-channel Frequency Translating –IR units: 40, 37, 34, -100 2-channel Frequency Translating –SD units: 37, 34, 31, -100

© Avitec AB

February 2005

35 (102)


2-channel Frequency Translating –DD units: 37, 34, 31, -100 4-channel Frequency Translating –ER units: 40, 37, 34, -100 4-channel Frequency Translating –IR units: 37, 34, 31, -100 4-channel Frequency Translating –SD units: 34, 31, 28, -100 4-channel Frequency Translating –DD units: 34, 31, 28, -100 2-channel Fiber Fed repeaters: 37, 34, 31, -100 4-channel Fiber Fed repeaters: 34, 31, 28, -100 Output power -100 means output power is turned off. Example: SET LVD 1 43 2 43

sets chain 1 and chain 2 peak limiting to 43 dBm. Format on getting parameters in 2-channel repeaters: GET LVD

Replies: 1 X 2 Y

X is out level in downlink chain 1 and Y is out level in downlink chain 2. Example: GET LVD

Reply: 1 37 2 -100

meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 37 dBm in chain one, while chain 2 has output power turned off. Format on getting parameters in 4-channel repeaters: GET LVD


X is out level in downlink chain 1, Y is out level in downlink chain 2, Z is out level in downlink chain 3 and W is outlevel in chain 4. Example: GET LVD

Reply: 1 34 2 34 3 34 4 -100

meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 34 dBm in chain 1, chain 2 and chain 3, while chain 4 has output power turned off. 3.59

LVU - Peak Power Out level Uplink

Attribute type: Read and Write This attribute is used to control the peak power limiting in the uplink path. Format on setting peak power: SET LVU K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]

K is the chain selector, and X is the maximum peak power (outlevel) in the uplink chain before the ALC is activated. Optionally peak power in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command. The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-channel and frequency translating repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel repeaters. Depending on repeater model, the different valid peak powers in dBm are: 2-channel repeaters: 4-channel repeaters: 2-channel Frequency Translating –ER, -IR units: 2-channel Frequency Translating –SD units: 2-channel Frequency Translating –DD units: 4-channel Frequency Translating –ER, -IR units: 4-channel Frequency Translating –SD units:

© Avitec AB

37, 34, 31, -100 34, 31, 28, -100 37, 34, 31, -100 -10, -13, -16, -100 -7, -10, -13, -100 34, 31, 28, -100 -13, -10, -7, -100

February 2005

36 (102)


4-channel Frequency Translating –DD units: 2-channel Fiber Fed repeaters: 4-channel Fiber Fed repeaters:

-10, -13, -16, -100 -1, -4, -7, -100 (-1 is not a recommended setting) -4, -7, -10, -100

Output power -100 means output power is turned off. Example: SET LVU 1 34 2 34

sets chain 1 and chain 2 peak limiting to 34 dBm. Format on getting parameters in 2-channel repeaters: GET LVU

Replies: 1 X 2 Y

X is out level in uplink chain 1 and Y is out level in uplink chain 2. Example: GET LVU

Reply: 1 37 2 -100

meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 37 dBm in chain one, while chain 2 has output power turned off. Format on getting parameters in 4-channel repeaters: GET LVU


X is out level in uplink chain 1, Y is out level in uplink chain 2, Z is out level in uplink chain 3 and W is outlevel in uplink chain 4. Example: GET LVU

Reply: 1 34 2 34 3 34 4 -100

meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 34 dBm in chain 1, chain 2 and chain 3, while chain 4 has output power turned off. 3.60

MAD - Main Address

Attribute type: Read and Write When SMS is used for communication, the controller contains a list of four addresses that are allowed to read and write attributes from the controller (refer to attribute ADD for a description of how to modify the list). All addresses have read access to the controller, but only address one and two can set parameters and perform ACT commands. However, alarms and reports are always sent to the main address. Main Address select which one of the four addresses in the list is the main address. Format: X

X is 1 to 4. Example: GET MAD

Reply: 3

means that address number three is the main address. Example: SET MAD 2

Changes main address to two. Note! When communication is done via Data Call (refer to attribute DEV), attribute MAD is obsolete.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

37 (102)


3.61

MAR - Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle

Attribute type: Read and Write If there is an alarm toggling between OK and ERROR, the controller will continuously send alarms to the OMC, with the new alarm detected, and then directly end of alarm, causing the communications interface between the controller and the OMC to be blocked for a long time. If lots of alarms are received at the OMC, the operator must be able to send a message to disable the particular alarm at the controller until service of the unit has been performed. The Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle takes care of this problem by defining a minimum time between two consecutive alarms from the same alarm source. Typically the MAR should be set to a minimum of two or three times the time it takes for the controller to report the alarm to the OMC. Format: X

X is the Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle in minutes. Example: GET MAR

Reply: 3

meaning that the minimum time between two consecutive alarms is three minutes. Example: SET MAR 4

changes this interval to four minutes. Note! The first error will always be detected with the normal Threshold time, only the repeated alarms will be blocked/delayed. 3.62

MCT - Modem Connection Time

Attribute type: Read and Write When a repeater is answering an incoming modem call, or calling up the OMC to deliver an alarm or a report, the controller will wait up to MCT seconds for the call to be established. If no communication is established within this time, the call will be hung up. Format: X

X is the connection time in seconds. Example: GET MCT

Reply: 45

meaning that the repeater will wait up to 45 seconds for a call to be established. Example: SET MCT 50

changes the timeout to 50 seconds. 3.63

MDL - Repeater Model

Attribute type: Read only This attribute returns a string containing the repeater model. The repeater model is built up of a number of fields, uniquely identifying the repeater model: Format: [Model][GSM System][Repeater Series][Number of channels][Optional Frequency Band Configuration][Optional Repeater Configuration]

© Avitec AB

February 2005

38 (102)


[Model] is ‘CSR’ for conventional repeaters, ‘CSF’ for Fiber Fed repeaters and ‘CSFT’ for Frequency Translating repeaters (in band and band shifting). [GSM System] is ‘9’ for GSM900 and GSM-R, ‘18’ for DCS1800 and ‘19’ for PCS1900. For Band Translating repeaters, combination repeated band and link band denotes the [GSM System] parameter. ‘918’ is a GSM900 repeater with DCS1800 link, ‘189’ is a DCS1800 repeater with GSM900 link, 98 is a GSM900 repeater with link on GSM850. [Repeater Series] is always set to ‘2’ [Number of channels] is number of channels the repeater is capable of amplifying, 2 or 4. [Optional Frequency Band Configuration] If repeater is used in the GSM-R band, this is set to ‘R’, and if repeater is used in the E-GSM band, this is set to ‘E’. [Optional Repeater Configuration] If this is a Frequency translating repeater (CSFT), the following identifiers apply: ’-SD’, meaning this repeater has a Single BTS port, and is a Donor unit. ‘-DD’, meaning this repeater has Dual BTS ports, channels Duplexed, and is a Donor unit. ‘-IR’, meaning this repeater has Internal combiner for sever antenna, and is a Remote unit. ‘-ER’, meaning this repeater has External (air) combiner for sever antenna, and is a Remote unit. Example 1: GET MDL

Replies: CSFT922R-DD

meaning that this is a frequency translating (CSFT) 2-channel repeater in the GSM-R band with Dual BTS ports, channels Duplexed, and is a Donor unit. Example 2: GET MDL

Replies: CSF1824

meaning that this is a Fiber Optic fed repeater in the DCS1800 band, capable of repeating up to 4 channels. Note! As an exception to the above, Band Shifting repeater CSFT18922 always have link capabilities on the GSM-E band, without having the [Optional Frequency Band] set to E. 3.64

MGA - Maximum Gain

Attribute type: Read only Returns maximum gain in repeater. Format: X

X is maximum gain in dB. Example: GET MGA

Reply: 108

meaning that maximum gain in the repeater is 108 dB. Note 1! This attribute only replies with maximum gain that the repeater is able to give, not what it is currently configured for. Note 2! Please refer to attribute RFP for detailed description about the gain distribution in the repeater. 3.65

MIS - Modem Initialization String

Attribute type: Read and Write

© Avitec AB

February 2005

39 (102)


In order for some modems to work correctly in a network, they might require different configurations. The configuration is modified with this attribute. Format:

is the actual modem initialization string. Example: GET MIS

Reply: AT+CBST=7,0,1

which is the modem specific modem initialization string. Example: SET MIS AT+CBST=71,0,1

modifies the modem initialization string. Note 1! Modem string must NOT contain any white space (blanks). Note 2! The changes will not take effect until the user logs out from the controller. As soon as the user logs out, the initialization of the modem will be initiated. 3.66

MPE - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Enabled

Attribute type: Read and Write The controller can be configured to automatically turn off and turn on the modem once per day. This feature can be used to ensure that the modem parameters when using for example GSM modems contain the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc. This attribute configures whether automatic power cycling should be enabled or not. Format: X

X = 1 means modem power cycling is enabled X = 0 means modem power cycling is disabled Example: GET MPE

Reply: 1

means that the modem power cycling is enabled. Example: SET MPE 0

disables the automatic modem power cycling. Timepoint for when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last modem Power Cycling timepoint, use attribute LPC. In order to perform an instant modem power cycling, please refer to attribute ACT RCD in section “Miscellaneous Command Attributes”. 3.67

MPT - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Timepoint

Attribute type: Read and Write The controller can be configured to automatically turn off and turn on the modem once per day. This feature can be used to ensure that the modem parameters when using for example GSM modems contain the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc. This attribute configures at what timepoint the modem power cycling should be performed. Format: HHMMSS

HH is the hours (in 24 hour notation), MM is minutes and SS is seconds specifying the modem power cycling timepoint.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

40 (102)


Example: GET MPC

Reply: 010000

means that the modem power cycling is performed att one in the morning. Example: SET MPC 160000

configures modem power cycling to be performed at 4 in the afternoon. Enabling / Disabling of the automatic power cycling can be configured with attribute MPE. Timepoint for when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last modem Power Cycling timepoint, use attribute LPC. In order to perform an instant modem power cycling, please refer to attribute ACT RCD in section “Miscellaneous Command Attributes”. 3.68

MNR - Maximum Number of Alarm Retransmissions

Attribute type: Read and Write Every alarm is sent to the OMC up to MNR number of times, or until it is acknowledged. The alarms are retransmitted with RCA minutes intervals. When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the main address. The alarms can also be acknowledged with the command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely. Example: SET MNR 4

Sets the number of retransmissions to 4. 3.69

MRR - Maximum Report Retransmission

Attribute type: Read and Write Every heartbeat and traffic / activity report is sent to the OMC up to MRR number of times, or until it is successfully delivered. The reports are retransmitted with RCR minutes intervals. When using data call, report is considered successfully delivered when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the report. In case of SMS, report is considered successfully delivered when it has been successfully transmitted to the SMSC. Format: X

X is interval in minutes. Example: GET MRR

Reply: 3

meaning that the repeater will try to retransmit a failed report 3 times. Example: SET MRR 2

Sets the number of retransmissions to 2. 3.70

MSG - Message Counter

Attribute type: Read and Write When a message (alarm, SMS-reply or report) is sent to the Avitec Element Manager, the message contains a message number. This message number is increased for every message sent (except for alarm and report retransmission). If the controller is communicating via SMS, all four addresses (as read by attribute ADD) have their own counter.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

41 (102)


The MSG attribute is used to receive the list of these four counters. Format on getting parameters: 1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W

X, Y, Z and W are the individual counters 1 – 4. Example: GET MSG

Reply: 1 00167 2 03421 3 00032 4 00000

indicating the different counters for addresses 1 to 4. Format on setting value: X M

X is the counter to modify, and M is the new value. X is from 1 to 4, and M is from 0 to 99999 Example: SET MSG 4 234

Sets the value of counter 4 to 234. Note 1! Counters are wrap around, i.e. when reaching 99999, next value is 0. Note 2! When an address is changed (SET ADD), corresponding counter is cleared. Note 3! When using data call, only counter 1 is used for the alarm and report message numbers. 3.71

MTP - Modem Type

Attribute type: Read and Write Attribute is used to determine/configure what modem type installed in the repeater. Format:

is one of WAVECOM INTEGRA STANDARD TRIOEXT WAVECOM is the external Wavecom GSM module INTEGRA is the on-board Wavecom GSM module STANDARD is a normal Standard Hayes compatible modem TRIOEXT is the TrioRail external GSM-R modem. (only available in GSM-R repeaters). If remote communication is disabled (using command SET DEV NUL), the string “Modem disabled” is returned. When setting the modem type, the same names are used. For the standard modem, the short form STD can be used. Example: SET MTP STD

sets the modem type to Standard Hayes compatible modem. 3.72

NCH - Number of Channels

Attribute type: Read only Returns the number of channels the repeater is capable of repeating. Example: GET NCH

Replies:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

42 (102)


2

meaning that the repeater is capable of repeating 2 channels. 3.73

NCT - Network Connect Time

Attribute type: Read and Write This attribute is used to configure how long to wait before trying to initialize a modem after power up or a modem power cycle. Format: X

X is in seconds. Example: GET NCT

Reply: 15

meaning modem connect time is set to 15 seconds. Example: SET NCT 30

Sets this time to 30 seconds. 3.74

NOL - Number of Successful Logins

Attribute type: Read only Format: X Y

X is number of successful logins locally, and Y is number of successful logins remotely Example: GET NOL

Reply: 55 123

means that 55 successful and 123 successful remote logins have been made. 3.75

NUA - Next Un-acknowledged Alarm

Attribute type: Read only This attribute gives the next non-acknowledged alarm in the alarm log. If no alarm exists, a ‘-‘ is replied. Format: “”

Example: GET NUA

Reply: 00042 101202 145523 PW2 CR EQ 1 “Current power level is 0.0 V”

Please refer to ACT ACK in section “Miscellaneous Command Attributes” for details on how to acknowledge alarms. 3.76

OLV - Optical Levels

Attribute type: Read only By using this attribute, transmitted and received optical level for the Fiber Optic Interface can be obtained. Format:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

43 (102)


represents the dBm value of transmitted optical level represents the dBm value of the received optical level If there is a communications error with the Fiber Optic Interface, ‘- -‘ (two dashes separated by a blank) is replied. If input signal is lover than lowest detectable value,
Reply: -5 –11

meaning that transmitted optical level is -5 dBm and received optical level is -11 dBm. Note! This attribute is only used in Fiber Optic repeaters. 3.77

OPL - Output Levels

Attribute type: Read only Displays the maximum output power of the last sampled frame. The output power is continuously sampled, and the highest value each second is saved in the controller on a chain by chain basis. Reply format in 2-channel repeaters: X Y Z W

where value is output level in dBm X is output level in chain 1 UL Y is output level in chain 2 UL. Z is output level in chain 1 DL. W is output level in chain 2 DL. If a value is below lowest detectable level, '
Reply: <12 <12 39 32

This means chain 1 UL and 2 UL is lower than lowest detectable level (12 dBm), chain 1 DL has 39 dBm output power level and chain 2 DL has 32 dBm output power. Reply format in 4-channel repeaters: X Y Z W K L M N

where value is input level in dBm X is output level in chain 1 UL Y is output level in chain 2 UL Z is output level in chain 3 UL. W is output level in chain 4 UL K is output level in chain 1 DL L is output level in chain 2 DL M is output level in chain 3 DL N is output level in chain 4 DL If a value is below lowest detectable level, '
Reply: <12 27 <12 <12 37 32 35 <12

© Avitec AB

February 2005

44 (102)


This means that chain 1 UL, 3 UL, 4 UL and 4 DL has output level lower than lowest detectable level (12dBm), 2 UL has an output power of 27 dBm. Output power in 1 DL is 37 dBm, 2 DL is 32 dBm and outlevel in 3 DL is 35 dBm. 3.78

ORP - OMC to Controller Password

Attribute type: Write only When the controller is configured to use data call for configuration and alarm transmission, the OMC have a unique password to log in to the controller, together with a unique username, OMCUNAME. Format: SET ORP MMMMMMMM

MMMMMMM is a password, up to 8 characters long. Note 1!. If data call is used, this password should be changed from the Avitec Element Manager. If SMS is used, this password should be changed to avoid unauthorized access to the controller. Note 2!. This login will NOT cause any VLI, LGO or CLR alarms to be sent. Note 3!. When logging in with this user ID, Terminal Mode is automatically set to 1. 3.79

PDC - Power Downlink measurement Configuration

Attribute type: Read and Write This attribute is used to configure the way the BCCH is measured. By default, all repeaters measure the BCCH only on chain one. By changing this attribute, the BCCH can be measured on other channels as well. When BCCH is measured on more than one chain, the repeater will always make sure that at least one of the chains have an output power above threshold configured with ALA PDL attribute. This attribute can be used to maintain BCCH monitoring in network where BTS uses the second TRX as a backup for TRX one. Furthermore, this attribute can be used in systems where more than one cell feeds the repeater, for Example two BTS’s with two TRX’s feeds one four channel repeater. Measurements can be used to ensure that the signal from both BTS’s / cells are sufficiently high. Note1! By changing this attribute, all PDL alarm sources will be reset. If a PDL alarm was detected, an end of alarm will be generated, and, if BCCH still is too low, a new PDL alarm after the configured time. Note 2! Setting Required on a non installed/available channel will have no effect. Format in 2-channel repeaters: XY

X represents chain one and Y chain two. X, Y can be either R as Required E as Either S as Skip measurements on this chain Required means that this chain MUST have BCCH high enough. Either means that this chain OR one of the other needs to have BCCH all the time. Skip means that this chain is ignored in the BCCH measurements. Example 1: GET PDC

Reply: RS

means that chain one must have BCCH output power, while two is ignored. Example 2: GET PDC

Reply:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

45 (102)


EE

means that any of the two channels should have BCCH above the threshold all the time, or an alarm will be triggered Example: SET PDC RS

configures the repeater to require BCCH output power on chain one, while chain two is ignored. Format in 4-channel repeaters: XYZW

X represents chain one, Y chain two, Z chain three and W chain 4. X, Y can be either R as Required E as Either S as Skip measurements on this chain Required means that this chain MUST have BCCH high enough. Either means that this chain OR one of the other needs to have BCCH all the time. Skip means that this chain is ignored in the BCCH measurements. Example 1: GET PDC

Reply: RSRS

means that chain one and three must have BCCH output power, while two and four are ignored. Example 2: GET PDC

Reply: EEEE

means that any of the four channels should have BCCH above the threshold all the time, or an alarm will be triggered Example: SET PDC RSSS

configures the repeater to require BCCH output power on chain one, while chains two through four are ignored. 3.80

PDL - Power Downlink Level

Attribute type: Read only Status of BCCH output power measurement in the downlink chains. Format in 2-channel repeaters: XY

X represents the BCCH status for chain 1 and Y for chain 2. 1 means that output power in BCCH is lower than the configured threshold (configured with attribute ALA PDL) 0 means that output power level is OK. If measurement (configurable with attribute PDC) shouldn’t be performed on chain, a ‘-‘ is reported. If PDC for the chains are set to Either, and none of the chains reports output power, all configured chains will report ‘1’ (Error). Example 1: GET PDL

Reply: 00

meaning that output power of BCCH is OK on chains one and two.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

46 (102)


Example 2, PDC is configured as RS: GET PDL

Reply: 1-

meaning that BCCH in chain one requires BCCH above a certain threshold, but chain reports a BCCH alarm. Format in 4-channel repeaters: XYZW

X represents the BCCH status for chain 1, Y for chain 2, Z for chain 3 and W for chain 4. 1 means that output power in BCCH is lower than the configured threshold (configured with attribute ALA PDL) 0 means that output power level is OK. If measurement (configurable with attribute PDC) shouldn’t be performed on chain, a ‘-‘ is reported. If PDC for the chains are set to Either, and none of the chains reports output power, all configured chains will report ‘1’ (Error). Example 1: GET PDL

Reply: 00--

meaning that output power of BCCH is OK on chains one and two, and that chains three and four are configured as Skip in the PDC attribute. Example 2, PDC is configured as RSRS: GET PDL

Reply: 0-1-

meaning that BCCH in chain one and three requires BCCH above a certain threshold, but chain three reports a BCCH alarm. 3.81

PIN - Sets the PIN Code Used to Lock Up GSM Module

Attribute type: Write only Sets the PIN code associated with the SIM card in the GSM module. Format: SET PIN XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX is a number, up to 8 characters long, representing the PIN code of the SIM card. Note! If wrong PIN code is entered, the controller will only try to open it up once. After that it will not try to lock it up again until the PIN code is changed. This is to avoid that the SIM card is blocked if wrong PIN code is enabled. 3.82

PLB - Level of BCCH output power in Downlink

Attribute type: Read only This attribute displays BCCH output power in the downlink channels. By default, the BCCH is monitored in downlink chain one. However, for special purposes, the BCCH can be configured to be monitored in other chains (see attribute PDC). Format in 2-channel repeaters: X Y

X, Y is the BCCH output power in dBm for downlink chains 1 DL and 2 DL. If BCCH is not measured in chain, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. If value is lower than lowest detectable value, a ‘
© Avitec AB

February 2005

47 (102)


GET PLB

Reply: 33 –

meaning that output power in chain one downlink is 33 dBm, while chain two not is configured for BCCH downlink measurement. Format in 4-channel repeaters: X Y Z W

X, Y is the BCCH output power in dBm for downlink chains 1 DL, 2 DL, 3 DL and 4 DL. If BCCH is not measured in chain, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. If value is lower than lowest detectable value, a ‘
Reply: 33 – <12 -

meaning that output power in chain one downlink is 33 dBm, while chain two is not configured for BCCH downlink measurement, chain 3 has less than 12 dBm and downlink chain 4 is not configured for BCCH measurements. 3.83

PSD - Power Supply Distribution Levels

Attribute type: Read only This attribute is used to read out the snapshot power supply levels in all the modules in the repeater. Format in 2-channel conventional and frequency shifting repeaters:

is the +28 V measured in the Power Supply is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL is the +15 V measured in the Power Supply is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL is the +6.45 V measured in the Power Supply is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL is the +6.45 V measured in the Reference Generator is the +6.45 V to the controller, measured in the Power Supply If communication between the controller and the module where voltage is measured is in error, a ‘-‘ is reported. Example: +28.0 +28.1 - +15.1 +15.1 - +6.5 +6.5 - +6.4

This shows the different power supply levels in the modules, except for power supply levels in LIMPA DL, which has a communications failure. Format in conventional and frequency shifting 4-channel repeaters:

is the +28 V measured in the Master Power Supply is the +28 V measured in the Slave Power Supply is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL 1 is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL 2 is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL 1 is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL 2 is the +15 V measured in the Master Power Supply

© Avitec AB

February 2005

48 (102)


is the +15 V measured in the Slave Power Supply is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL 1 is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL 2 is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL 1 is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL 2 is the +6.45 V measured in the Master Power Supply is the +6.45 V measured in the Slave Power Supply is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL 1 is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL 2 is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL 1 is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL 2 is the +6.45 V measured in the Reference Generator is the +6.45 V to the controller, measured in the Power Supply If communication between the controller and the module where voltage is measured is in error, a ‘-‘ is reported. Example: +28.0 +0.0 +28.0 +0.0 +28.1 +0.0 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +6.5 +6.5 +6.5 +6.5 +6.4 +6.5 +6.4 +6.5

This shows the different power supply levels in the modules. In the Example, 0.0 Volts is measured at the +28 V in the Slave Power Supply, LIMPA UL 2 and LIMPA DL 2. This indicates that the level out from the Slave Power Supply is broken. Format in fiber optic 2-channel repeaters:

is the +28 V measured in the Power Supply is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL is the +15 V measured in the Power Supply is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL is the +15 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface is the +6.45 V measured in the Power Supply is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL is the +6.45 V measured in the Reference Generator is the +6.45 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface is the +6.45 V to the controller, measured in the Power Supply If communication between the controller and the module where voltage is measured is in error, a ‘-‘ is reported. Example: +28.0 +28.1 - +15.1 +15.1 - +15.0 +6.5 +6.5 - +6.4 +6.4

This shows the different power supply levels in the modules, except for power supply levels in LIMPA DL, which has a communications failure. Format in fiber optic 4-channel repeaters:

is the +28 V measured in the Master Power Supply is the +28 V measured in the Slave Power Supply is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL 1 is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL 2 is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL 1 is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL 2 is the +15 V measured in the Master Power Supply

© Avitec AB

February 2005

49 (102)


is the +15 V measured in the Slave Power Supply is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL 1 is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL 2 is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL 1 is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL 2 is the +15 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface is the +6.45 V measured in the Master Power Supply is the +6.45 V measured in the Slave Power Supply is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL 1 is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL 2 is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL 1 is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL 2 is the +6.45 V measured in the Reference Generator is the +6.45 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface is the +6.45 V to the controller, measured in the Power Supply If communication between the controller and the module where voltage is measured is in error, a ‘-‘ is reported. Example: +28.0 +0.0 +28.0 +0.0 +28.1 +0.0 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +15.0 +6.5 +6.5 +6.5 +6.5 +6.4 +6.5 +6.4 +6.4 +6.5

This shows the different power supply levels in the modules. In the Example, 0.0 Volts is measured at the +28 V in the Slave Power Supply, LIMPA UL 2 and LIMPA DL 2. This indicates that the level out from the Slave Power Supply is broken. 3.84

PSL - Status of Power Supply Level

Attribute type: Read only The Power Supply constantly monitors the mains input power level. This can be used to generate an alarm if repeater is experiencing a power brownout or a blackout. Note! In order to read out current power supply level, please refer to attribute ALV. Format: X

X=0 means mains power level is within configured thresholds X=1 means power level is outside allowed interval (too low or too high) If there is a communications error with master power supply, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. Example: GET PSL

Replies: 1

meaning input power supply level is outside allowed interval. 3.85

PTM - Power Supply Temperature Status

Attribute type: Read only The Power Supply temperature is constantly monitored, and if temperature is outside configured interval, an alarm is generated. This attribute shows the status of the power supply temperature. Note! In order to read out current power supply temperature, please refer to attribute ALV. Format in 2-channel repeaters: X

X = 0 means temperature OK and X = 1 means temperature is outside allowed interval. If communication with Power Supply is in error, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. Example: GET PTM

© Avitec AB

February 2005

50 (102)


Reply: 1

indicating that the Power Supply Temperatyre is outside allowed interval. Format in 4-channel repeaters: XY

X is temperature status for Master Power Supply. Y is temperature status for Slave Power Supply. 0 means status is OK, and 1 means power supply temperature is outside allowed interval. If communication with power supply is in error, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. Example: GET PTM

Reply: 01

indicating that the Master Power Supply temperature is OK, and that Slave Power Supply temperature is in error. 3.86

PW1 - Status of Power 1

Attribute type: Read only This is the status for the +28V Power Distribution in the repeater. Format for 2-channel repeaters: XYZ

X is status for +28 V in Power Supply Y is status for +28 V in LIMPA UL. Z is status for +28 V in LIMPA DL. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW1

Replies: 0-1

meaning status is OK in Power Supply, there is a communications failure with LIMPA UL, and there is an error in +28 V level to LIMPA DL. Format for 4-channel repeaters: XYZWKL

X is status for +28 V in Master Power Supply Y is status for +28 V in Slave Power Supply Z is status for +28 V in LIMPA UL 1. W is status for +28 V in LIMPA UL 2. K is status for +28 V in LIMPA DL 1. L is status for +28 V in LIMPA DL 2. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW1

Replies:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

51 (102)


010101

meaning status is OK in Master Power Supply, LIMPA UL 1 and LIMPA DL 1 an an, there is a power failure in Slave Power Supply, LIMPA UL 2 and LIMPA DL 2. In this Example, it seems the Slave Power Supply is failing; leading to a power failure in the two LIMPA’s fed by the slave power supply. 3.87


Attribute type: Read only This is the status for the +15 V Power Distributions in the repeater. Format for 2-channel repeaters: XYZ

X is status for +15 V in Power Supply Y is status for +15 V in LIMPA UL. Z is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW2

Replies: 0100

meaning status is OK in Power Supply and LIMPA DL and there is an error in +15 V level to LIMPA UL. Format for 2 channel Fiber Optic fed repeaters: XYZ

X is status for +15 V in Power Supply Y is status for +15 V in LIMPA UL. Z is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL. W is status for +15 V in Fiber Optic Interface. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW2

Replies: 010

meaning status is OK in Power Supply and LIMPA DL and there is an error in +15 V level to LIMPA UL. Format for conventional and frequency shifting 4-channel repeaters: XYZWKL

X is status for +15 V in Master Power Supply Y is status for +15 V in Slave Power Supply Z is status for +15 V in LIMPA UL 1. W is status for +15 V in LIMPA UL 2. K is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL 1. L is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL 2 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

52 (102)


Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW2

Replies: 010000

meaning there is an error in +15 V power supply in LIMPA UL1, and all other statuses are OK. Format for 4-channel Fiber Optic fed repeaters: XYZWKLM

X is status for +15 V in Master Power Supply Y is status for +15 V in Slave Power Supply Z is status for +15 V in LIMPA UL 1. W is status for +15 V in LIMPA UL 2. K is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL 1. L is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL 2 M is status for +15 V in Fiber Optic Interface. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW2

Replies: 0100000

meaning there is an error in +15 V power supply in LIMPA UL1, and all other statuses are OK. 3.88


Attribute type: Read only This is the status for the +6.45 V Power Distribution in the repeater. Format for conventional and frequency shifting 2-channel repeaters: XYZW

X is status for +6.45 V in Power Supply Y is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL. Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL. W is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW3

Replies: 0010

meaning status is OK in Power Supply, LIMPA UL and Reference Generator and there is an error in +6.45 V supply to LIMPA DL. Format for 2-channel Fiber Optic repeaters: XYZWK

X is status for +6.45 V in Power Supply Y is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

53 (102)


Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL. W is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator. K is status for +6.45 V in Fiber Optic Interface. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW3

Replies: 00100

meaning status is OK in Power Supply, LIMPA UL and Reference Generator and there is an error in +6.45 V supply to LIMPA DL. Format for conventional and frequency shifting 4-channel repeaters: XYZWKLM

X is status for +6.45 V in Master Power Supply Y is status for +6.45 V in Slave Power Supply Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 1. W is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 2. K is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 1. L is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 2. M is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW3

Replies: 0010000

meaning there is an error in +6.45 V power supply in LIMPA UL2, and all other statuses are OK. Format for 4-channel Fiber Optic repeaters: XYZWKLM

X is status for +6.45 V in Master Power Supply Y is status for +6.45 V in Slave Power Supply Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 1. W is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 2. K is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 1. L is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 2. M is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator. N is status for +6.45 V in Fiber Optic Interface. 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means communication with module is in error. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply Distribution levels). Example: GET PW3

Replies: 0010000

© Avitec AB

February 2005

54 (102)


meaning there is an error in +6.45 V power supply in LIMPA UL2, and all other statuses are OK. 3.89


Attribute type: Read only This is the status for the +6.45 V Power Supply to the Control Module, as measured in the power supply. Format: X

X is status for +6.45 V Power Supply to the controller 0 means OK 1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds - (dash) means rack is not installed / configured. Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels). Example: GET PW4

Replies: 1

meaning that power supply to control module is outside allowed interval. Note! Since this power supply is feeding the controller itself, if power supply is completely lost the controller will not be up and running, and hence can not be detected / alarmed. 3.90

PWD - Set Password to Access Repeater

Attribute type: Write only The repeater is accessed via four different User ID’s. User ID 1 and 2 have full access to the repeaters parameters, while users 3 and 4 only have read access to the repeater. Attribute PWD is used to change the password associated with the different user ID’s. Format: SET PWD X NNNNNNNN

X is the selector of what password to modify, 1 ≤ X ≤ 4 N is a password, up to 8 characters long, and NOT including white space. Example: SET PWD 1 AVITECAB

Modifies password number 1 to AVITECAB. Note! To modify the corresponding user ID, please refer to attribute UID. 3.91

RCA - Repetition Cycle for non Acknowledged Alarms

Attribute type: Read and Write Every alarm is sent to the OMC up to MNR number of times, or until it is acknowledged. The alarms are retransmitted with RCA minutes intervals. When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the main address. The alarms can also be acknowledged with the command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely. Format: X

X is the interval in minutes. Example: GET RCA

Reply: 10

© Avitec AB

February 2005

55 (102)


meaning that the interval between retransmissions is 10 minutes. Example: SET RCA 12

sets the interval to 12 minutes 3.92

RCH - Repetition Cycle for Heartbeat

Attribute type: Read and Write Sets the interval for how often the heartbeat reports are sent to the repeater OMC. The heartbeat report is a report containing all relevant status parameters of the repeater. If a report fails to be sent, it will try to retransmit the reports with a settable interval. Refer to attributes RCR and MRR for information on how to change the number of retransmissions and retransmit interval. Format: X

X is the heartbeat interval in minutes. Valid values are from 1 to 1440 minutes. Setting the interval to 0 (zero) means no heartbeat reports will be transmitted. Example: GET RCH

Reply: 1335

meaning that a heartbeat will be sent to the repeater OMC every 1335 minutes. Example: SET RCH 1400

changes this interval to 1400 minutes. Note! As soon as the heartbeat interval is changed, and the user is logged out, a new heartbeat will be sent to the repeater OMC, in order to cause resynchronization of the heartbeat intervals between the repeater and the OMC. 3.93

RCR - Repetition Cycle for Reports

Attribute type: Read and Write Every heartbeat and traffic / uplink activity report is sent to the OMC up to MRR number of times, or until it is successfully delivered. The reports are retransmitted with RCR minutes intervals. When using data call, report is considered successfully delivered when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the report. In case of SMS, report is considered successfully delivered when it has been successfully transmitted to the SMSC. Format: X

X is the retransmit interval in minutes. Valid values for X is from 1 to 20 minutes Example: GET RCR

Reply: 3

meaning that the report will be retransmitted after 3 minutes. Example: SET RCR 2

Sets the time between retransmissions to 2 minutes. 3.94

RFP - RF Parameters

Attribute type: Read only This attribute gives information about gain and gain distribution in the repeater

© Avitec AB

February 2005

56 (102)


Format:

is the maximum gain in dB in Uplink and Downlink is the gain in dB from the inport to the input to the LIMPA’s in Uplink and Downlink is the loss in dB after the Power Amplifiers to the outport of the repeater in Uplink and Downlink is the lowest output level that the detector in the Power Amplifiers in Uplink and Downlink. Example: GET RFP

Reply: 45.0 45.0 17.1 –25.1 2.1 4.9 –15.1 17.2

means maximum gain in repeater in Uplink and Downlink is 45.0 dBm. In uplink, the gain before the RSSI is 17.1 dB, while the gain in downlink is –25.1 dB (an attenuation of 25.1 dB). Loss after the PA in uplink is 2.1 dB and in downlink 4.9 dB. The lowest detectable output in the uplink is –15.1 dBm, while lowest detectable in Downlink is 17.2 dBm. 3.95

RID - Repeater ID

Attribute type: Read and Write The repeater ID gives the OMC (Avitec Element Manager) a way to give the each network element (boosters, repeaters, Hubs) a unique number in the network. Format: XX-YY-ZZZZ

XX,YY,ZZZZ are unique numbers to identify the element. The length of this attribute is exactly 10 characters. Example: GET RID

Reply: 01-01-0334

which is the unique ID for this element. Example: SET RID 02-01-0077

Modifies the repeater ID. Note! If the element is installed into and controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, this attribute should NEVER be modified. This ID is unique in the Element Manager database. Changing this ID will cause the OMC database to be corrupt. 3.96

RLY - Relay Status

Attribute type: Read only By using the attribute status of the relay can be read out. Format: N

N is 0 or 1 0 means that relay circuit is currently open, no alarms configured to activate relay is detected. 1 means relay circuit is closed. One or more of the alarms configured to activate the relay is detected.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

57 (102)


3.97

ROP - Controller to OMC password.

Attribute type: Write only When the controller is configured for data call, and the equipment is controlled from the Avitec Element Manager, every time the controller connects to the OMC, a login is required. The username is the equipment ID (attribute RID), and the password is set with this attribute, ROP. Format: NNNNNNNN

NNNNNNN is the password, up to 8 characters, no space allowed. Example: SET ROP REPEATER

sets the password to REPEATER. Note! This password should normally be changed from the Element Manager, since a wrong configured password will cause the login to the Element Manager to fail. 3.98

RSP - Repeater Status Parameters

Attribute type: Read only This attribute replies with the status of all alarm sources in the repeater. The attribute can be used to quickly get an overview of all the statuses in the repeater. Non Fiber Optic Fed Repeaters: Attribute replies with the status of the alarm sources:

Example: GET RSP

Reply: 0- 00 11 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 00000 0100010 000 0 0 000 000 0000 0 0

which means all parameters are OK, except door status and status of external alarm input 4. Note! Reply on this parameter will be different depending on if this is a 2-channel or 4-channel capable repeater. Fiber Optic Fed Repeaters: Attribute replies with the status of the alarm sources:

Example: GET RSP

Reply: 0- 00 11 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 00000 0100010 000 0 0 000 000 0000 0 0 00

which means all parameters are OK, except door status and status of external alarm input 4. Note! Reply on this parameter will be different depending on if this is a 2-channel or 4-channel capable repeater. 3.99

SAC - SMS Acknowledge Configuration

Attribute type: Read and Write This command affects controllers using SMS for alarm transmission. SAC configures how the controller determines whether an alarm is acknowledged or not. Format: X

© Avitec AB

February 2005

58 (102)


X can be of two values: 0 means that the alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the OMC 1 means that an alarm is considered acknowledged when the alarm is successfully transmitted to the Short Message Service Center (SMSC), i.e. when the message is successfully delivered to the network. Example: GET SAC

Reply: 0

meaning that the controller requires an acknowledge message back from the OMC (if the individual alarm source is configured for that). Example: SET SAC 1

changes the behavior to consider the alarm acknowledged when the message is sent successfully to the SMSC. Note! This configuration will work in conjunction with the other alarm attributes (ALA XXX, RCA and MNR). If for example SAC is set to “1”, and RCA is set to 3 and MNR 3, the controller will try to send the message to the SMSC center up to 3 times with 3 minute intervals. If the individual alarm source is configured to not require an acknowledge, it will only try to send it once to the SMSC. 3.100

SFT - Secondary OMC address Fallback Timer

Attribute type: Read and Write This configures how many minutes the controller will wait before going back to the primary address again after calling the secondary OMC address. If this parameter is set to zero, no fallback will be done, i.e., the controller will toggle between the addresses for every failure to deliver messages. See also attributes SSC, ASC and command ACT UPA. Format: X

X is number of minutes to wait before fallback to primary OMC address. Example: GET SFT

Reply: 15

meaning that the controller will use the secondary address for 15 minutes before going back to normal OMC address. Example: SET SFT 10

changes this value to 10 minutes. 3.101

SIS - System Information String

Attribute type: Read only Compact string containing system versions and system dates. The string contains the following data, separated by spaces Format:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

59 (102)


is a string delimited by “ (double quote) signs, containing the controller BIOS version. If no information is available, an empty string (“”) is replied. is a string delimited by “ (double quote) signs, containing on chip specific version information. is a string delimited by “ (double quote) signs, containing the controller hardware version. This can also be obtained with the attribute HWV. is a string delimited by “ (double quote) signs, containing the controller software version. This can also be obtained with the attribute SWV. reports the serial number of the controller (4 characters). If no information is available, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. reports the serial number of the controller (4 characters). If no information is available, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. contains the repeater initialization time on the format HHMMSS, with 24 hours notation. If no information is available, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. contains the repeater initialization date on the format DDMMYY. If no information is available, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. contains the controller initialization time on the format HHMMSS, with 24 hours notation. If no information is available, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. contains the controller initialization date on the format DDMMYY. If no information is available, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported. is a string delimited by “ (double quote) signs, containing information entered during manufacturing. is a string delimited by “ (double quote) signs, containg the timepoint when the software was built. Example: GET SIS

Reply: “1.11” “12” “H041001C” “2.32” 2JG5 2JF3 174200 991220 120333 991101 “JK” “Jan 18 2002 10:09:30”

indicating that BIOS version is 1.11, PLD version is 12, hardware version is H041001C and software version is 2.32. The control module has the serial number 2JG5, the repeater serial is 2JF3, the system (repeater) was initialized at 17:42.00 on Dec 20, 1999, and controller was initialized at 12:03.33 on Nov 1, 1999. Factory information is JK. Finally, software was built at 18’th of January 2002 at 10:09:30 AM. 3.102

SIT - System Initialization Time

Attribute type: Read only Returns a string containing the system initialization time, i.e. when the controller was initialized for the first time. Format: HHMMSS DDMMYY

Where HHMMSS is the time point, with 24 hours notation, and DDMMYY is the date of the initialization. Example: GET SIT

Reply: 164500 070498

© Avitec AB

February 2005

60 (102)


indicating that the controller was initialized on 7’th of April 1998 at 16:45. 3.103

SSC - Secondary Service Center Address

Attribute type: Read and Write When controller is configured for data call, if the controller fails to dial the first service center (configured with the attribute ASC), the controller will automatically switch over to the secondary service center address. If secondary address is not set, it will be neglected. Furthermore, if controller experiences problems connecting to secondary address, it will switch back to primary address. A fallback timer can be configured so that the controller goes back to primary address after a specified interval. Please refer to attribute SFT for details Note! The controller will always check if first address is set. If not, the secondary address will be ignored. Example: GET SSC

Reply: 118118

meaning that the secondary address is set to 118118. Example: SET SSC

Disables the use of a secondary address. 3.104

SUT - System Up Time

Attribute type: Read only Format: N

Returns the number of seconds that has elapsed since last system reset, or since last power up. Example: GET SUT

Reply: 34423

meaning that the system booted up 34 423 seconds ago. 3.105

SWV - Software Version

Attribute type: Read only Format:

returns a string with the software version in the control module. Example: GET SWV

Reply: 2.36

meaning that the software version is 2.36. 3.106

SZD - Status of Synthesizers in Downlink Chain

Attribute type: Read only This parameter returns the status of the synthesizer in the downlink path. Each LIMPA contains two chains, and each chain contains two synthesizers. One synthesizer is for down conversion of the radio signals to the IF frequency, and one for up conversion. The reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPA’s.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

61 (102)


Format for 2 channel repeaters: XYZW

X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) 0 indicates an OK 1 indicates an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with LIMPA is in error. Example: 0100

means all synthesizers in downlink are OK, except Out Synthesizer in chain 1 DL. Format for 4 channel repeaters: XYZWKLMN

X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1) K is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 3 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2) L is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 3 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2) M is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 4 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2) N is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 4 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2) 0 indicates an OK 1 indicates an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with LIMPA is in error. Example: 00000010

means all synthesizers in downlink are OK, except In Synthesizer in chain 4 DL. 3.107

SZU - Status of Synthesizers in Uplink Chain

Attribute type: Read only This parameter returns the status of the synthesizer in the uplink path. Each LIMPA contains two chains, and each chain contains two synthesizers. One synthesizer is for down conversion of the radio signals to the IF frequency, and one for up conversion. The reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPA’s. Format 2 channel repeaters: XYZW

X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 1 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 1 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1) X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 2 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 2 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1) 0 indicates an OK indicates an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with LIMPA is in error. Example: 0100

means all synthesizers in uplink are OK, except Out Synthesizer in chain 1 UL. Format 4 channel repeaters: XYZWKLMN

X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 1 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1) Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 1 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1) X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 2 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1)

© Avitec AB

February 2005

62 (102)


Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 2 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1) K is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 3 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2) L is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 3 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2) M is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 4 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2) N is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 4 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2) 0 indicates an OK 1 indicates an Error. A ‘-‘ means communication with LIMPA is in error. Example: 00000010

means all synthesizers in uplink are OK, except In Synthesizer in chain 4 UL. 3.108

TAG - Equipment Tag

Attribute type: Read and Write The tag can be used to give the equipment a unique name, for example the site name. Format:

can be up to 20 characters long, NOT containing any space. All characters will be converted to uppercase. Example: GET TAG

Reply: X3431_HIGHWAY_15

Indicating the tag associated with this equipment. Example: SET TAG ERNEST_HEMINGWAY

modifies the tag. 3.109

TEM - Status of Temperature


X=0 means status is OK X=1 means status is ERROR Example: GET TEM

Reply: 1

meaning temperature is outside configured threshold (see attribute ALA TEM). 3.110

TIM - Time

Attribute type: Read and Write Time of the real time clock in the repeater Format: HHMMSS

HH is 24-hour representation of the hours, MM is minutes, and SS is seconds. Example: GET TIM

© Avitec AB

February 2005

63 (102)


Reply: 145000

meaning the repeater time is 10 minutes to three in the afternoon. Example: SET TIM 150542

modifies the time settings. Note! If the time in the repeater is changed, as soon as the user logs out, a new heartbeat will be sent, in order to cause resynchronization of the heartbeat intervals between the repeater and the OMC. 3.111

TMD - Terminal Mode

Attribute type: Read and Write When logged in to the controller, either locally or remote, the output to the user can appear in two different ways: Terminal Mode or VT100 mode. Terminal mode gives the replies back to the user on the next row, while VT100 mode replies in the old-fashioned way, with the clock, ID and Tag etc displayed on the top of the screen. Terminal Mode is normally used by Avitec Maintenance Console and Avitec Element Manager. Format: SET TMD X

X = 0 means VT100 mode X = 1 means Terminal mode Example: SET TMD 1

Switches to Terminal mode. Note! When logging in, Terminal Mode is always defaulted to VT100 mode. 3.112

UID - User ID

Attribute type: Write only The repeater is accessed via four different User ID’s. User ID 1 and 2 have full access to the repeaters parameters, while users 3 and 4 only have read access to the repeater. Attribute UID is used to change the different user ID’s. Format: SET UID X NNNNNNNN

X is the selector of what user ID to modify, 1 ≤ X ≤ 4. N is a name, up to 8 characters long, and NOT including white space. Example: SET UID 1 KAFKA

Modifies user ID number 1 to KAFKA. Note! To modify the corresponding password, please refer to attribute PWD. 3.113

VLD - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Downlink

Attribute type: Read only This attribute replies with the valid peak limiting values settable in the downlink path of the repeater, as set with the attribute LVD. Format: [Value 1] [Value 2] .. [Value N]

where the different values are in dBm. A value of -100 means that this is used to turn the output power off. Example:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

64 (102)


GET VLD

Reply: -100 31 34 37

meaning that the different peak limiting levels possible to set are -100 (turning off output power), 31, 34 and 37 (dBm). 3.114

VLU - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Uplink

Attribute type: Read only This attribute replies with the valid peak limiting values settable in the uplink path of the repeater, as set with the attribute LVU. Format: [Value 1] [Value 2] .. [Value N]

where the different values are in dBm. A value of -100 means that this is used to turn the output power off. Example: GET VLU

Reply: -100 28 31 34

meaning that the different peak limiting levels possible to set are -100 (turning off output power), 28, 31 and 34 (dBm). 3.115

WRD - Status of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink

Attribute type: Read only The repeaters measure the VSWR on the antenna ports, and, if reflected power is too high, an alarm is triggered. This can indicate a bad connector or a broken antenna. Format in all repeaters except Frequency Translating –ER repeaters: X

X=0 means reflected power level in downlink is OK X=1 means reflected power level in downlink chain is in error X=’-‘ (dash) means there is a failure in communication between the controller and the FDM where VSWR is measured. Example: GET WRD

Reply: 1

meaning that reflected power in the downlink path is outside of the allowed range (please refer to ALA WRD for configuration). Format in Frequency translating –ER repeaters: XY

X is status for reflected power at antenna port 1 downlink Y is status for reflected power at antenna port 2 downlink ‘ 0 means reflected power level is OK 1 means reflected power level is in error. ’-‘ (dash) means there is a failure in communication between the controller and the FDM where VSWR is measured. Example: GET WRD

Reply: 01

meaning that reflected power at antenna port 2 downlink 2 is outside of the allowed range (please refer to ALA WRD for configuration), and port 1 is OK.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

65 (102)


3.116

WRL - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Level

Attribute type: Read only Shows the return loss in the downlink at the antenna ports of the repeater. Depending on repeater type, there are different number of antennas connected, and hence different number of levels to display. Format in all repeaters except Frequency Translating –ER repeaters: X

X is the return loss in dB at the server antenna (downlink path). If return loss is higher than repeater is able to detect, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported instead Example: GET WRL

Reply: 13

meaning that the return loss in the downlink is 13 dB. Format for Frequency translating –ER repeaters: X Y

X is the return loss in dB at the server antenna 1 (downlink path) Y is the return loss in dB at the server antenna 2 (downlink path). If return loss is higher than repeater is able to detect, a ‘-‘ (dash) is reported instead. Example: GET WRL

Reply: 19 -

meaning that the return loss in downlink 1 is 19 dB and downlink 2 is not detectable.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

66 (102)


4 Traffic Related GET and SET Attributes Every 15 minutes, an average of the utilization is calculated and stored in a log. At a configurable time of the day, the report can optionally be sent to the repeater OMC. The report consists of 96 intervals, each interval 15 minutes long. As soon as the report is sent away, OR after measurements of the first interval of the next day is completed, the log is cleared. The utilization is measured in percentage: Utilization = (Number occupied timeslots) / (Number of available timeslots) * 100 Example: A two-channel repeater is sampled for one frame. 9 timeslots are utilized, which means ”Number of occupied timeslots” is increased by 9, and ”Number of available timeslots” is increased by 16. 4.1

AIS - Active Intervals String

Attribute type: Read only Reply format: X Y M……M

X is the date of the first measurement in the format DDMMYYY Y is the time point of the start of the first interval in the measurement in the format HHMMSS M..M shows information about the 96 intervals of 15 minutes each M = '0' means no active timeslots were detected during the 15 minutes interval M = '1' means the activity was detected during the interval. M =’-‘ (dash) means interval has not been measured. This can be used for troubleshooting if there are suspicions that a Server antenna is broken. During startup of the repeater this string is filled with ‘-‘. It is also cleared when the traffic report is successfully delivered to the OMC. The starting time point of the first measurement is set with the attribute TPD. Refer to attribute TAT on how configure the thresholds for what is an active interval. 4.2

ATS - Active Timeslots

Attribute type: Read only This is a snapshot of how many timeslots where detected during last sampled frame. Format in 2-channel repeaters: GET ATS

Replies: X Y

X is the number of occupied timeslots in Uplink chain 1 Y is number of timeslots in chain 2 Uplink. Value of X, Y is 0-8 timeslots. If communication with LIMPA is in error, value is replaced by a dash ('-'). Example: 3 0

means that 3 timeslots were detected in chain 1, and that no timeslots where detected in chain 2 uplink. Format in 4-channel repeaters: GET ATS

Replies: X Y Z W

© Avitec AB

February 2005

67 (102)


X is the number of occupied timeslots in Uplink chain 1 Y is timeslots in chain 2 Uplink, Z is timeslots in chain 3 Uplink and W is timeslots in chain 4 Uplink. Value of X, Y, Z , W is 0-8 timeslots. If communication with LIMPA is in error, value is replaced by a dash ('-'). Example: 0 3 – -

means that no timeslots where detected in uplink chain a, 3 timeslots were detected in chain 2, and that there was a communications alarm with LIMPA 2 in uplink (containing chains 3 and 4). 4.3

CTI - Current Traffic Interval

Attribute type: Read only Format: GET CTI

Replies: X

X is the Current Traffic Measurement Interval Each Interval is 15 minutes, and the traffic is reported in 24-hour intervals. Therefore X is between 1 and 96 The first interval starts at the time point set by attribute TPD. 4.4

LAT - Last Active Timeslot

Attribute type: Read only Format: GET LAT

Replies: DDMMYY HHMMSS

HHMMSS is the time point, with 24 hours notation, and DDMMYY is the date of the last measured timeslot / activity. This can be used for troubleshooting if there are suspicions that a Server antenna is broken. During startup of the repeater this time point is set to current time. Example: GET LAT

Reply: 164500 070498

indicating that last active timeslot was detected on 7’th of April 1998 at 16:45. 4.5

PRF - Sending of Report

Attribute type: Read and Write This parameter determines whether sending of traffic report is enabled or not. Format: X

X = 0 means sending of traffic report enabled X = 1 means sending of traffic report disabled Example: GET PRF

Reply: 1

means no traffic report will be sent to the repeater OMC.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

68 (102)


Example: SET PRF 0

enables the sending of the report. 4.6

TAT - Traffic Activity Threshold

Attribute type: Read and Write The Traffic Activity Threshold defines how many timeslots should be sampled during one traffic interval (15 minutes) in order for the repeater to consider traffic to have passed through the repeater. This threshold is used in conjunction with the Active Intervals String (attribute AIS. Interval is settable from 1 to 32000, but value is defaulted to 10. Format: X

X determines the number of detected timeslots needed in one interval to define that traffic has been sent through the repeater. Note! This value is the total number of timeslots, independent of the number of channels installed in the repeater. Example: GET TAT

Reply: 100

meaning that 100 timeslots are needed to define an interval as active. Example: SET TAT 10

changes this value to 10 timeslots. 4.7

TTL - Traffic Threshold

Attribute type: Read and Write Threshold for traffic. This defines above what level the in signal has to be in the uplink path to be considered traffic. Format: GET TTL

Replies: X

X is the lowest signal that should be sampled on the input to be considered traffic. Example: GET TTL

Replies: -85

meaning that in signal has to be –85 dBm or higher to be considered traffic. Example: SET TTL –80

changes this value to –80 dBm. 4.8

TPD - Timepoint of Traffic Report Transmission

Attribute type: Read and Write This parameter sets the time of the day when the traffic report is to be sent to the repeater OMC.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

69 (102)


If a report fails to be sent, the repeater will try to retransmit the reports with a settable interval. Refer to attributes RCR and MRR for information on how to change the number of retransmissions and retransmit interval. Format: HHMMSS

HH is the hour in 24-hour representation, MM is minutes and SS is seconds. Example: GET TPD

Reply: 031500

means that the report is sent to the repeater OMC at a quarter past three in the morning. Example: SET TPD 230000

Changes this time to 11 in the evening. 4.9

TRF - Traffic String

Attribute type: Read only Reply format: X Y M……M

X is the date of the first measurement in the Format DDMMYYY Y is the time point of the start of the first interval in the measurement in the format HHMMSS M..M shows information about the 96 intervals of 15 minutes each M = '0' means a utilization of 0% to 2% M = '1' means a utilization of 2% to 4% ... M = '9' means a utilization of 18% to 20% M = 'A' means a utilization of 20% to 22% M = 'B' means a utilization of 22% to 24% ... ... M = 'T' means a utilization of 58% to 60% M = 'a' means a utilization of 60% to 62% M = 'b' means a utilization of 62% to 64% M = 't' means a utilization of 98% to 100% If no data is available, a dash ('-') is reported. The starting time point of the first measurement is set with the attribute TPD. 4.10

UCI - Utilization Current Interval

Attribute type: Read only Gives a reply of the utilization so far in current interval. Format: X

X is a one decimal value of the repeater utilization. Example: GET UCI

Reply: 16.8

meaning 16.8% of the timeslots are used so far in the current interval.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

70 (102)


4.11

ULI - Utilization Last Interval

Attribute type: Read only Gives a reply of the utilization in last measured interval. Format: X

X is a one decimal value of the repeater utilization of the last measured interval. Example: GET ULI

Reply: 12.7

meaning 12.7% of the timeslots where used in the last measured 15 minutes interval.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

71 (102)


5 Alarm Attribute Configuration Format: AAA X Y Z LLL UUU TTT

AAA is the alarm attribute to configure (see table below). X has double functionality. It determines whether an alarm should be send if error is detected, and it also configures whether the alarm relay should be affected by the alarm source. X = 0 means alarm transmission enabled, but alarm doesn’t affect the relay output X = 1 means alarm transmission disabled, and does not affect the relay. X = 2 means alarm transmission is enabled, and alarm affects the relay output. X = 3 means alarm transmission is disabled, but alarm affects relay output Y determines whether an alarm requires to be acknowledged or not. (When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the main address. The alarms can also be acknowledged with the command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely. If an alarm is not acknowledged, it will be retransmitted up to MNR (maximum number of retransmissions) times, with RCA (repetition cycle for alarms) minutes interval. Refer to attributes MNR and RCA.) Y = 0 means Acknowledge required Y = 1 means No acknowledge required Z is a threshold indicator, indicating how thresholds are used for this particular alarm source. Z = 1 means that both thresholds are used for alarm calculation. Z = 2 means that lower threshold is used Z = 3 means that upper threshold is used Z = 4 means that thresholds are ignored, i.e. digital measurement. Note! Changing parameter Z does NOT affect the measurement of the alarm source. Z is just an indicator of how the measurement is done, and should NEVER be changed. LLL is the value of the lower threshold used for alarm calculation UUU is the value of the upper threshold used for alarm calculation. TTT is the time an alarm has to be in erroneous state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA TEM

Returns: 0 0 3 000 060 5

This means that alarm is enabled and acknowledge required. Upper threshold is used in measuring the alarm, , lower threshold not set (000), 60 (degrees) is the upper threshold and that the temperature has to be higher than 60 for 5 seconds before an alarm is triggered. Example: SET ALA TEM 0 0 3 0 60 20

modifies the above alarm source to generate an alarm when the temperature has been above 60 degrees for more than 20 seconds. The following table describes the usage of the thresholds of the different alarm sources. 5.1

AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurements

Antenna isolation measurement is performed using a special feature in the LIMPA’s, allowing for output channel to be shifted from the input channel. Two channels are used, one BCCH channel, and one so called Listener channel. By default, these channels are the ones configured in chain one and two, but can with attribute AIC (Antenna Isolation Measurement

© Avitec AB

February 2005

72 (102)


Channels) be changed. The measurement is automatically performed by the following steps: 1.

Output is turned of in the repeater downlink paths, except in chain 1.

2.

Channel in chain 1 is optionally changed to the alternative BCCH channel.

3.

Channel in chain 2 is optionally changed to the alternative Listener channel.

4.

Output channel in chain 1 downlink is changed to the Listener channel.

5.

Since the BCCH in chain one is transmitted as the Listener channel, we measure the input signal on the Listener channel. Antenna isolation can now be calculated as transmitted output power in chain one – received input signal in chain two.

6.

Compare the measured signal with the alarm threshold ( ALA AIM ), and, depending on measurement result, generate alarm or end of alarm.

7.

All radio parameters are restored to the default.

The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain timepoint of the day, configurable using attributes AIE and AIT) All measurements in the repeater will affect the alarm transmission, meaning that a user initiated measurement (using command ACT AIM) will also generate an alarm if isolation is outside allowed interval. Lower Threshold: This is treated differently in Frequency Translating repeaters and conventional repeaters; 2- and 4-channel Conventional Repeaters: The lower threshold determines how many dB above the gain settings in downlink chain one the isolation must be. Frequency Translating Repeaters: The lower threshold shows the lowest absolute isolation in dB before an alarm is triggered. Upper Threshold: Not used. Time Threshold: This indicates how many times the antenna isolation should have been measured as outside allowed interval before an alarm is triggered. Note! Since the antenna isolation is scheduled for measurement once per day, it is recommended that the value is set to one. Example in Frequency Translating repeaters: GET ALA AIM

Returns: 0 0 2 75 0 1

This means that alarm is enabled and acknowledge required. Lower threshold is used in calculating the alarms. Lowest allowed antenna isolation is 75 dB, and the isolation needs to be outside allowed interval in one measurement before the alarm is triggered. Example in Frequency 2- and 4-channel Conventional Repeaters: SET ALA AIM 0 0 2 20 0 1

This sets the alarm as enabled and that acknowledge is required. Lower threshold is used in calculating the alarms. Lowest allowed antenna isolation is 20 dB above gain settings in chain 1 DL, and the isolation needs to be outside allowed interval in one measurement before the alarm is triggered. If the gain in the repeater is set to 84 dB, the isolation in this example must be at least 104 dB. Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and repeaters CSFT18922 and CSFT91822.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

73 (102)


5.2

AMD - Amplifier Chain Downlink

When measuring the amplifier chains, the input signal to and output power in the chain is measured. Depending on input signal level, the expected output power is calculated with regards to attenuation and gain in repeater. If the expected output level is not correct, an alarm is generated.. Lower Threshold: This indicates how many dB’s the output power is allowed to drop from the expected output power before an alarm is generated. Upper Threshold: This indicates how many dB’s the output power is allowed to increase from the calculated output power before an alarm is generated. This defines how many seconds an alarm source must be in error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA AMD

Reply: 0 0 1 003 003 003

meaning that output power level can be 3 dB higher or 3 dB lower than expected before an alarm is triggered. The amplifier chain must be measured as error for 3 seconds before alarm is triggered. 5.3

AMU - Amplifier Chain Uplink

When measuring the amplifier chains, the input signal to and output power in the chain is measured. Depending on input signal level, the expected output power is calculated with regards to attenuation and gain in repeater. If the expected output level is not correct, an alarm is generated.. Lower Threshold: This indicates how many dB’s the output power is allowed to drop from the expected output power before an alarm is generated. Upper Threshold: This indicates how many dB’s the output power is allowed to increase from the calculated output power before an alarm is generated. Time Threshold: This defines how many seconds an alarm source must be in error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA AMU

Reply: 0 0 1 003 003 003 meaning that output power level can be 3 dB higher or 3 dB lower than expected before an alarm is triggered. The amplifier chain must be measured as error for 3 seconds before alarm is triggered. 5.4

ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink

The LIMPA’s contain circuitry to see how far into saturation the amplifier chain has gone. As described for the ASL attribute, the saturation can be detected in four different levels: 0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal) 1 means amplifier is working in the optimum range. 2 means amplifier is going into saturation and that gain should be decreased. 3 means amplifier is well into saturation, and that gain must be decreased to avoid degradation of signal quality. This alarm attribute configures when a saturation alarm should be generated. Lower Threshold:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

74 (102)


Not used Upper Threshold: This defines what from what saturation level (0-3) an alarm situation is entered. Setting this value to 0 will always generate an alarm. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the amplifier chain has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA ASD

Reply: 0 0 3 000 002 3

indicates that if saturation level two or higher is entered an alarm situation has occurred, and that an alarm will be triggered after three seconds in this situation. 5.5

ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink

The LIMPA’s contain circuitry to see how far into saturation the amplifier chain has gone. As described for the ASL attribute, the saturation can be detected in four different levels: 0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal) 1 means amplifier is working in the optimum range. 2 means amplifier is going into saturation and that gain should be decreased. 3 means amplifier is well into saturation, and that gain must be decreased to avoid degradation of signal quality. This alarm attribute configures when a saturation alarm should be generated. Lower Threshold: Not used Upper Threshold: This defines what from what saturation level (0-3) an alarm situation is entered. Setting this value to 0 will always generate an alarm. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the amplifier chain has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA ASU

Reply: 0 0 3 000 002 3

indicates that if saturation level two or higher is entered an alarm situation has occurred, and that an alarm will be triggered after three seconds in this situation. 5.6

BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment

The mobile equipment is backed up by an external battery, which contains enough power to generate an alarm to the repeater OMC in case of a power failure. The Battery alarm generates an alarm if the battery charge under normal conditions (no power failure) drops below a configurable threshold, or if a too high charge is detected. Lower Threshold: Indicates the lower voltage level that is allowed before an alarm is generated. The level is displayed without decimal point. Configuring lower level as 89 means that the lowest allowed level is 8.9 Volts. Upper Threshold: Indicates the upper voltage level that is allowed before an alarm is generated. The level is displayed without decimal point. Configuring upper level as 110 means that the highest allowed level is 11.0 Volts.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

75 (102)


Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the battery charge has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA BAT

Reply: 0 0 1 083 120 3

indicates that if the power drops below 8.3 Volts, or exceeds 12.0 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. After 3 seconds in error state, an alarm is triggered. 5.7

CLR - Changes made by logged in user

If a user logs in to the repeater, and changes one or more of the repeater settings, an alarm can be sent to the repeater OMC. The alarm configuration for the CLR attribute is only used to configure whether the alarm should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm requires an acknowledgement. Lower Threshold: Not Used Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Not Used Example GET ALA CLR

Reply: 0 0 4 0 0 0

indicates that the alarm will be generated, and also requires an acknowledgement. 5.8

COM - Communication Between Controller and Active Devices

The COM alarm indicates if there is an error in the communication between the controller and active devices. This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the communication is OK, or in Error. Lower Threshold: Not Used. Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds a communications error should be detected before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA COM

Reply: 0 0 4 0 0 3

Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the communication must fail for 3 seconds before an alarm is generated. 5.9

DOO - Door

The Door alarm is generated if the door is opened. This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the door is closed (OK), or opened (Error). Lower Threshold: Not Used.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

76 (102)


Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the door should be opened before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA DOO

Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 010

meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the door needs to be opened for 10 seconds before an alarm is triggered. 5.10


The external alarm allows the user to connect external alarm sources, for example fire alarms or external door sensors to the controller. This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the external alarm is OK, or in Error. Lower Threshold: Not Used. Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds an external alarm should be in error state before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA EX1

Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 020

Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the external alarm needs to be in Error state for 20 seconds before an alarm is generated. Note! In order to configure the external alarm polarity (active high or active low), please refer to attribute EXT. 5.11



Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 005

Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the external alarm needs to be in Error state for 5 seconds before an alarm is generated. Note! In order to configure the external alarm polarity (active high or active low), please refer to attribute EXT.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

77 (102)


5.12



Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 002




Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 010


FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver

The Fiber Optic Receiver alarm is triggered when there is a failure in the Fiber Optic Interface receiver equipment. This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the receiver is OK, or broken (Error). Lower Threshold: Not Used. Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold:

© Avitec AB

February 2005

78 (102)


Defines how many seconds the receiver should be in error condition opened before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA FRX

Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 003

Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the receiver needs needs to be in error for 3 seconds before an alarm is triggered. Note! This alarm attribute is only used in Fiber Optic fed repeaters. 5.15

FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter

The Fiber Optic Transmitter alarm is triggered when there is a failure in the Fiber Optic transmitter equipment. This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the transmitter is OK, or broken (Error). Lower Threshold: Not Used. Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the transmitter should be in error condition opened before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA FTX

Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 003

Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the transmitter needs needs to be in error for 3 seconds before an alarm is triggered. Note! This alarm attribute is only used in Fiber Optic fed repeaters. 5.16

ILI - Illegal Logins exceeded limit

When a user makes an invalid login attempt, the repeater increases a counter of invalid logins. This counter is decreased by one every hour. If the counter reaches a configurable threshold (please refer to the ILA attribute), an alarm can be generated to the repeater OMC. The alarm configuration for the ILI attribute is only used to configure whether the alarm should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm requires an acknowledgement. Lower Threshold: Not Used Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Not Used Example GET ALA ILI

Reply: 0 1 4 0 0 0

indicates that the alarm will be generated, but doesn’t require an acknowledgement.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

79 (102)


5.17

IOD - Input Overload Downlink

The input circuitry in the downlink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the downlink chain. The measurement is always measured in downlink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector, covering the entire downlink band where the repeater is operational. This alarm is used to detect if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. This can for example be a base station from another operator being mounted too close to the repeater donor antenna. This is a purely digital measurement, meaning that either the measurement is OK, or input overload is high. Lower Threshold: Not Used Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Number of consecutive measurements on the input overload detector before an alarm is triggered. Exampl: GET ALA IOD

Repyl: 0 0 4 0 0 3

indicates that the alarm transmission is enabled, and also requires an acknowledgement. The input overload has to be measured as too high three consecutive times before an alarm is triggered. 5.18

IOU - Input Overload Uplink

The input circuitry in the uplink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the uplink chain. The measurement is always measured in uplink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector, covering the entire uplink band where the repeater is operational. This alarm is used to detect if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. This can for example be harmonics from TV-transmitters or other strong radio signals. This is a purely digital measurement, meaning that either the measurement is OK, or input overload is high. Lower Threshold: Not Used Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Number of consecutive measurements on the input overload detector before an alarm is triggered. Exampl: GET ALA IOU

Repyl: 0 0 4 0 0 3

indicates that the alarm is enabled, and also requires an acknowledgement. The input overload has to be measured as too high three consecutive times before an alarm is triggered. 5.19

LGO - User logged out from repeater

If a user logs in to the repeater, an alarm is triggered.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

80 (102)


Also, an alarm can be configured to be sent away indicating the user logged out. The alarm configuration for the LGO attribute is only used to configure whether the alarm should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm requires an acknowledgement. Lower Threshold: Not Used Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Not Used Example GET ALA LGO

Reply: 0 0 4 0 0 0

indicates that the alarm will be generated, and also requires an acknowledgement. 5.20

PDL - Power Level BCCH Downlink

If the output power of the BCCH in the downlink drops below a certain threshold, for example if an obstacle is raised between the feeding base station and the repeater, an alarm is generated. Lower Threshold: This indicates the lower value in dBm for when the BCCH is considered too low. Upper Threshold: Not Used. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds a too low output power should be measured before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA PDL

Reply: 0 0 3 024 000 003

indicating that if BCCH drops below 24 dBm an erroneous level is detected, upper threshold is ignored and the output level must be too low for 3 seconds before an alarm is generated. Note! If the lower threshold is set lower than the lowest detectable output power in the repeater, the alarm will be ignored. 5.21

PSL - Power Supply Level

The Power Supply Level is configured to generate an alarm if the mains power supply level drops below or increases above a configured threshold. Depending on if power supply is AC or DC configured, the alarm thresholds are set correspondingly. Lower Threshold: Indicates the level in Volts that is the lowest allowed input voltage. Upper Threshold: Indicates the level in Volts that is the highest allowed input voltage. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the input voltage has to be outside allowed interval in order to be considered an alarm. Example: GET ALA PSL

Reply: 0 0 1 207 263 3

© Avitec AB

February 2005

81 (102)


indicates that if the allowed input Voltage range is 207 Volts to 263 Volts, and that an alarm will be triggered if Voltage is outside allowed interval for 3 seconds. 5.22

PTM - Power Supply Temperature

If the temperature in the power supply exceeds or decrease below a certain threshold, an alarm is triggered. Lower Threshold: Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too low. Upper Threshold: Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too high. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds a too high temperature should be measured before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA PTM

Reply: 0 0 1 -20 080 005

Meaning that lower threshold is –20° C , upper temperature threshold is 80° C and the power supply temperature must be out of range for 5 seconds before an alarm is generated. 5.23

PW1 - Power Supply 1

The Power Supply 1 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +28 V drops below, or raise above a certain threshold. This threshold is used for all alarm sources where the PW1 is monitored. Lower Threshold: Configures in Volts*10 how much the voltage can drop before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring lower threshold to 265 means that the lower threshold is 26.5 Volts. Upper Threshold: Configures in Volts*10 how much the voltage can increase before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring upper threshold to 290 means that the upper threshold is 29.0 Volts. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the Power Supply has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA PW1

Reply: 0 0 1 275 285 3

indicates that if the power drops 0.5 Volts, or increases 0.5 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also shows that after 3 seconds of error, an alarm is triggered. 5.24


The Power Supply 2 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +15 V drops below, or raise above a certain threshold. This threshold is used for all alarm sources where the PW2 is monitored. Lower Threshold: Configures in Volts*10 how much the voltage can drop before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring lower threshold to 145 means that the lower threshold is 14.5 Volts. Upper Threshold: Configures in Volts*10 how much the voltage can increase before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring upper threshold to 155 means that the upper threshold is 15.5 Volts.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

82 (102)


Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the Power Supply has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA PW2

Reply: 0 0 1 143 157 3

indicates that if the power drops 0.7 Volts, or increases 0.5 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also shows that after 3 seconds of error, an alarm is triggered. 5.25


The Power Supply 3 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +6.45 V drops below, or raise above a certain threshold. This threshold is used for all alarm sources where the PW3 is monitored. Lower Threshold: Configures in Volts*100 how much the voltage can drop before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring lower threshold to 610 means that the lower threshold is 6.1 Volts. Upper Threshold: Configures in Volts*100 how much the voltage can increase before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring upper threshold to 670 means that the upper threshold is 6.7 Volts. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the Power Supply has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA PW3

Reply: 0 0 1 630 680 3

indicates that if the power drops below 6.3 Volts, or exceeds 6.8 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also shows that after 3 seconds of error, an alarm is triggered. 5.26


The Power Supply 4 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +6.45 V feeding the controller drops below, or raise above a certain threshold. Lower Threshold: Configures in Volts*100 how much the voltage can drop before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring lower threshold to 630 means that the lower threshold is 6.3 Volts. Upper Threshold: Configures in Volts*100 how much the voltage can increase before an alarm status is entered. For example, configuring upper threshold to 670 means that the upper threshold is 6.7 Volts. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds the Power Supply has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered. Example: GET ALA PW4

Reply: 0 0 1 630 680 3

indicates that if the power drops below 6.3 Volts, or exceeds 6.8 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also shows that after 3 seconds of error, an alarm is triggered.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

83 (102)


5.27

SZD - Synthesizer Downlink

The synthesizer alarm indicates if a synthesizer in the repeater is unlocked. This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the synthesizer is OK, or in Error. Lower Threshold: Not Used. Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds a synthesizer should be unlocked before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA SZD

Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 003

Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the synthesizer needs to be unlocked for 3 seconds before an alarm is generated. 5.28

SZU - Synthesizer Uplink

The synthesizer alarm indicates if a synthesizer in the repeater is unlocked. This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the synthesizer is OK, or in Error. Lower Threshold: Not Used. Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds a synthesizer should be unlocked before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA SZU

Reply: 0 0 4 000 000 003

Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the synthesizer needs to be unlocked for 3 seconds before an alarm is generated. 5.29

TEM - Temperature

If the temperature in the unit exceeds or decrease below a certain threshold, an alarm is triggered. Lower Threshold: Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too low. Upper Threshold: Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too high. Time Threshold: Defines how many seconds a too high temperature should be measured before an alarm is generated. Example: GET ALA TEM

Reply: 0 0 1 -20 065 005

Meaning that lower threshold is –20° C , upper temperature threshold is 65° C and the temperature must be out of range for 5 seconds before an alarm is generated.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

84 (102)


5.30

VLI - Valid Login to repeater

If a user logs in to the repeater, an alarm is triggered. The alarm configuration for the VLI attribute is only used to configure whether the alarm should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm requires an acknowledgement. Lower Threshold: Not Used Upper Threshold: Not Used Time Threshold: Not Used Example GET ALA VLI

Reply: 0 1 4 0 0 0

indicates that the alarm will be generated, but does not require an acknowledgement. Note! The VLI alarm will not be sent to the repeater OMC until the user logged out from the repeater, and thus releases the communications interface. 5.31

WRD - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink

The VSWR unit monitors the reflected power level at the server anenna port(s). If the the difference between the transmitted and reflected power is too low, an alarm is generated. Lower Threshold: This configures how many dB that can differ between transmitted and reflected power in the downlink before an alarm is generated. Upper Threshold: Not used. Time Threshold: This defines after how many seconds in alarm condition that an alarm will be generated. Example: GET ALA WRD

Reply: 0 0 2 013 000 003

This shows that if the difference between transmitted and reflected power is less than 13 dB, and this is measured for three seconds in a row, an alarm will be generated.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

85 (102)


6 Miscellaneous Command Attributes The following commands are available both from login and, when supported, via Short Message Service (SMS). The commands can also be sent from the Avitec Element Manager and the Avitec Maintenance Console 6.1

ACT ACK

Acknowledges alarm Format: ACT ACK X

X is alarm with message number X. Example: ACT ACK 42

Acknowledges alarm with message number 42 Requires Read and Write access when logged in. Via SMS, this can only be performed by the Main Address 6.2

ACT AIM

This command is used to perform antenna isolation measurements. Antenna isolation measurement is performed using a special feature in the LIMPA’s, allowing for output channel to be shifted from the input channel. Two channels are used, one BCCH channel, and one so called Listener channel. By default, these channels are the ones configured in chain one and two, but can with attribute AIC (Antenna Isolation Measurement Channels) be changed. The measurement is performed by the following steps: 1.

Output is turned of in chain 2 of the repeater in the downlink path.

2.

Channel in chain 1 is optionally changed to the alternative BCCH channel.

3.

Channel in chain 2 is optionally changed to the alternative Listener channel.

4.

Output channel in chain 1 downlink is changed to the Listener channel.

5.

Since the BCCH in chain one is transmitted as the Listener channel, we measure the input signal on the Listener channel. Antenna isolation can now be calculated as transmitted output power in chain one – received input signal in chain two.

6.

Compare the measured signal with the alarm threshold ( ALA AIM ), and, depending on measurement result, generate alarm or end of alarm.

7.

All radio parameters are restored to the default.

The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain timepoint of the day (configured using attributes AIE and AIT). By default, downlink chain 1 and 2 settings are used for the antenna measurements. If only one chain is enabled in the repeater, or if measurement should be done on other channels, this attribute can be used to configure the alternate channels. Typically this measurement takes around 3-4 seconds. Under normal circumstances, the GSM network should be able to keep the call during this absence of radio signal, but in some cases the call might be dropped. If this measurement is requested remotely, the call might be dropped. In order to read out the last measurement, use the command GET LAI (Last Antenna Isolation Measurement).

© Avitec AB

February 2005

86 (102)


Note 1! This command will return the command prompt directly, and the actual measurement will be performed in the background. In order to get the last measurement, poll the GET LAI until time stamp in the reply shows that the measurement is completed. Note 2! Since Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters cannot oscillate, measuring antenna isolation will not give a meaningful result. For that reason, automatic antenna isolation is not by default enabled in these repeaters. 6.3

ACT CLO

Clears all entries in the alarm log. Requires Read and Write access when logged in. Via SMS, this can only be performed by the Main Address 6.4

ACT HBT

Heartbeat Request Causes the controller to send a heartbeat immediately after logout. Can be used to synchronize the heartbeat transmissions in the Element Manager. 6.5

ACT RCD

This command is used to perform a power cycle of the modem directly after the next logout from the repeater is performed. Note! The controller can also be configured to automatically turn off and turn on the modem once per day. This feature can be used to ensure that the modem parameters when using for example GSM modems contain the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc. Attribute MPE is used to configure if automatic modem power cycling should be enabled. Time point for when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last modem Power Cycling time point, use attribute LPC. 6.6

ACT RHW

Performs a hardware reset of the active devices ( not including the controller) 6.7

ACT RSR

Resets the controller software, as if the power has been switched off and back on. Requires Read and Write access when logged in. Via SMS, this can only be performed by the Main Address Note 1! If logged in, an automatic logout will immediately occur. Note 2! The controller always sends End of Power Supply Alarm after power up, so initiating ACT RSR will send this alarm to the repeater OMC. 6.8

ACT TRE

Test Relay Connection. For installation testing purposes, it is possible to test the open / close function of the relay. This test procedure makes sure the relay is closed for 2.5 seconds, then opens for 10 seconds, and finally closes for 2.5 seconds before going back to original state. Note! During this test interval, the relay connection will be unaffected by all alarms. 6.9

ACT UPA

Use Primary Address.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

87 (102)


Causes the controller to force the controller back to primary OMC address, in case secondary address is used.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

88 (102)


7 Commands The following commands are only available when logged in to the repeater, either via Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT), or via a remote login over a modem. 7.1

ACCESS MODEM

If user is logged in locally, the user can directly send characters from the keyboard to the modem attached to the controller. When typing ACCESS MODEM, the controller will send all the characters typed directly out the modem port. All characters replied back from the modem will go directly out the LMT port. This command can, together with the modem manual, be used to troubleshoot specific modem communication problems. To abort an ACCESS MODEM session, press -C, or use the escape sequence ‘---‘ . Note that the three ‘-‘ must be pressed within one second. Note! When accessing the modem port the modem might be configured with “echo off”, meaning that the characters entered will not be echoed back to the screen. In order to enable the characters to be echoed back from the modem, please hit . After that, type ATE1

followed by .The modem should then reply with OK

indicating that the echo is enabled. 7.2

CLEAR LOG

By entering this command, the alarm log in the controller will be cleared. This is the same as using the command ACT CLO, as described in section Miscellaneous Command Attributes. 7.3

CLEAR SCREEN

By entering this command, the screen will be cleared from old information. 7.4

HARDWARE

Displays a list of all the configured hardware devices in the equipment, including serial number, software and hardware versions. This command is also used to reconfigure the system after replacing a broken module. Format: HARDWARE REPLACE [Article Number]

is the serial number of the module that has been removed is the serial number of the new module [Article Number] is used if a passive module, such as a distribution board or external interface board is changed. Example 1: HARDWARE REPLACE 2J3A 3ASA

replaces the broken module 2J3A with the new module 3ASA. Example 2: HARDWARE REPLACE 3AZC 3EEF J691001A

© Avitec AB

February 2005

89 (102)


replaces the old module 3AZC with the new module 3EEF, with article number J691001A. 7.5

HELP

Displays a simple help screen. Note! This screen can also, if terminal emulation for the communications package is set to VT100, be brought up by pressing the key F1. 7.6

LOG

The LOG command displays all the entries in the alarm log. Information is given about when the alarm was detected, what kind of alarm, severity, attribute etc. 7.7

LOGOUT

Ends the controller login session. If logged in remotely, the modem connection will, as a part of the logout procedure, be disconnected. 7.8

MODEM

This command gives a quick overview of some of the modem configurations, such as modem type and initialization string etc. 7.9

MP

The controller is responsible for applying power to the communications equipment (CE). This command turns on and off the power to the modem (MP = Modem Power). MP ON Turn the power to the modem on. MP OFF Turn the power to the modem off. If this is done remotely, the connection will hang up immediately. 7.10

PERF

Displays the traffic report screen. Note! This screen can also, if terminal emulation for the communications package is set to VT100, be brought up by pressing the key F4. 7.11

REINIT

This command reinitializes ALL controller factory settings. The controller will prompt for Date, Time, serial number of active devices etc. Note! All the hardware configuration, address information, modem configuration, etc will be set to default values. This means that the unit will not be operational with the old settings anymore. This command should normally ONLY be used if a control module have been replaced. 7.12

SILENT ON SILENT OFF

When the user is logged out from the controller, the controller sends information out on the LMT port about current activities, such as modem check, alarm transmission and report transmissions etc. SILENT ON

configures the controller to not send any information out, while SILENT OFF

© Avitec AB

February 2005

90 (102)


will enable the controller to send information out on the LMT port. 7.13

STATUS

Displays the status screen, containing all relevant RF-parameters, and all status parameters. Note! This screen can also, if terminal emulation for the communications package is set to VT100, be brought up by pressing the key F3. 7.14

SYSTEM

Displays a screen with different system parameters, such as serial numbers, failure statistics and hardware/software versions. 7.15

TRACE AMP

This command displays a trace of the sampled input and output power levels. This trace is useful for verifying if BCCH signals exists, and see the approximate input and output signal levels in dBm. Also, gain calculation status is displayed for each chain, indicating whether the gain is within expected interval or not. If an output power is below lowest detectable output power, a ‘
Ipl:-106.9 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-53.7 Opl:36.5 - OK Ipl:-98.5 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-105.2 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-105.8 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-103.2 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-102.8 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-63.2 Opl:33.0 - OK Ipl:-106.6 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-53.7 Opl:36.5 - OK Ipl:-98.6 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-105.2 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-105.8 Opl:<15.0 - OK Ipl:-63.1 Opl:33.1 - OK Ipl:-106.8 Opl:<15.0 – OK

As seen in the example, chain 1 downlink (BCCH) has -53.7 dBm input signal, and the output signal is 36.5 dBm. Also, uplink channel 3 (a traffic channel) has an input signal of around -63 dBm and an output power of 33.1 dBm. Since input level + repeater gain corresponds to measured output power level, an OK is displayed after each measurement, indicating the amplifier chain works as expected. Note! Please refer to attributes IPL and OPL for further description of input and output power measurements. 7.16

TRACE TRAFFIC

The controller constantly measures all timeslots in the uplink paths of all the chains. Every 15 minutes an average of the utilization in the uplink path is calculated and stored in a log. By using the TRACE TRAFFIC command it is possible to see the actual utilization on a chain by chain basis. Depending on if this is a two or four channel repeater a number of columns are presented. The first two (or four) columns represent the number of time slots detected in last sampled frame. The following columns, starting with S: denotes number of timeslots detected in this interval. The columns starting with Tot: shows how many timeslots have elapsed so far in this interval. The % column shows percent of the timeslots have been active/occupied in this interval. Example: 1 0 S:1680 8220 Tot:259950 259950

© Avitec AB

%:1.46

February 2005

91 (102)


0 1 0 1

2 2 0 2

S:1708 S:1723 S:1730 S:1755

8244 8267 8301 8330

Tot:261683 Tot:263416 Tot:265149 Tot:266882

261683 263416 265149 266882

%:1.45 %:1.44 %:1.43 %:1.41

This trace shows an average utilization of around 1.4 % so far in this interval.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

92 (102)


8 Heartbeat Format For Status parameters ‘0’ means OK and ‘1’ means ERROR. The information in the Heartbeat message can also be achieved by using the command GET ALL, which will reply with all information except fields RepeaterID..Time. 8.1

Heartbeat Format in conventional 2-channel Repeaters

Field

Format

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

Message no

NNNNN

State

STATE

Date

DDMMYY

Time

HHMMSS

RCH

NNNN

Repetition cycle for heartbeat reports

CHA 1

NNN

Repeated channel in chain 1

CHA 2

NNN


ATU 1

NN

Attenuation in uplink chain 1

ATU 2

NN


ATD 1

NN

Attenuation in downlink chain 1

ATD 2

NN


LVU 1

NNN

Peak Limiting in uplink chain 1. If output power is turned off, - is replied.

LVU 2

NNN


LVD 1

NN

Peak Limiting in downlink chain 1. If output power is turned off, - is replied.

LVD 2

NN


PDL

BB

BCCH Status Downlink

ASU

BB

Status of amplifier saturation alarm uplink

ASD

BB

Status of amplifier saturation alarm downlink

AMU

BB

Status of amplifier chains uplink

AMD

BB

Status of amplifier chains downlink

SZU

BBBB

Synthesizer Alarm Uplink

SZD

BBBB

Synthesizer Alarm Downlink

COM

BBBBBB

Status communication with active devices

BAT / DOO / EXT / TEM

BBBBBB

State of battery charge for mobile phone equipment/ State of door / State of external pins 1-4 / Status of temperature

IOU / IOD / AIM

BBB

Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Antenna Isolation Measurement

PSL

B

Status of Power Supply input Level

PTM

B

Status of Power Supply Temperature

© Avitec AB

Description

February 2005

93 (102)


PW1

BBB

Status of +28 V Power Distribution

PW2

BBB

Status of +15 Power Distribution

PW3

BBBB

Status of +6.45 V Power Distribution

PW4

B

Status of +6.45 V to Controller

WRD

B

Status of VSWR downlink

8.2

Heartbeat Format in 2-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters

Field

Format

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

Message no

NNNNN

State

STATE

Date

DDMMYY

Time

HHMMSS

RCH

NNNN


CHA 1

NNN


CHA 2

NNN


ATU 1

NN


ATU 2

NN


ATD 1

NN


ATD 2

NN


LVU 1

NNN


LVU 2

NNN


LVD 1

NN


LVD 2

NN


PDL

BB


ASU

BB


ASD

BB


AMU

BB


AMD

BB


SZU

BBBB


SZD

BBBB


COM

BBBBBBB

Status communication with active devices


BBBBBB


IOU / IOD / Always 0

BBB

Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Always 0

PSL

B


PTM

B


© Avitec AB

Description

February 2005

94 (102)


PW1

BBB


PW2

BBB


PW3

BBBB


PW4

B


WRD

B


FRX/FTX

BB

Status Fiber Optic Receiver/Transmitter

8.3

Heartbeat Format in 2-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters

Field

Format

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

Message no

NNNNN

State

STATE

Date

DDMMYY

Time

HHMMSS

RCH

NNNN


CHA 1

NNN


CHA 2

NNN


LNK 1

NNN

Link Channel in chain 1

LNK 2

NNN

Link Channel in chain 2

ATU 1

NN


ATU 2

NN


ATD 1

NN


ATD 2

NN


LVU 1

NNN


LVU 2

NNN


LVD 1

NN


LVD 2

NN


PDL

BB


ASU

BB


ASD

BB


AMU

BB


AMD

BB


SZU

BBBB


SZD

BBBB


COM

BBBBBB(B)

Status communication with active devices (optionally an extra status byte in –ER repeaters)


BBBBBB


© Avitec AB

Description

February 2005

95 (102)


IOU / IOD / AIM

BBB

Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Antenna Isolation Measurement

PSL

B


PTM

B


PW1

BBB


PW2

BBB


PW3

BBBB


PW4

B


WRD

B(B)

Status of VSWR downlink (optionally an extra status byte in –ER repeaters)

8.4

Heartbeat Format in conventional 4-channel Repeaters

Field

Format

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

Message no

NNNNN

State

STATE

Date

DDMMYY

Time

HHMMSS

RCH

NNNN


CHA 1

NNN


CHA 2

NNN


CHA 3

NNN


CHA 4

NNN


ATU 1

NN


ATU 2

NN


ATU 3

NN


ATU 4

NN


ATD 1

NN


ATD 2

NN


ATD 3

NN


ATD 4

NN


LVU 1

NN


LVU 2

NN


LVU 3

NN


LVU 4

NN


LVD 1

NN


LVD 2

NN


© Avitec AB

Description

February 2005

96 (102)


LVD 3

NN


LVD 4

NN


PDL / ASU / ASD

BBBB BBBBBBBB

BCCH Status Downlink/ Amplifier Saturation Status Uplink/Downlink

AMU / AMD / SZU / SZD / COM

BBBBBBBB

Status of amplifier chains uplink / Downlink, Amplifier Saturation Alarm / Uplink / Downlink, Synthesizer Alarm Uplink / Downlink and Status of Communication with active devices in a compressed format. These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with COM alarm. For example, the AMU is sent as Hex ‘4’, which is extracted to 0100. However, COM alarm reports an alarm for LIMPA 2 uplink, why AMU should be extracted to 01--. Byte 1 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

AMU:1

AMU:2

AMU:3

AMU:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

AMD:1

AMD:2

AMD:3

AMD:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZU:1

SZU:2

SZU:3

SZU:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZU:5

SZU:6

SZU:7

SZU:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZD:1

SZD:2

SZD:3

SZD:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZD:5

SZD:6

SZD:7

SZD:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:1

COM:2

COM:3

COM:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:5

COM:6

COM:7

COM:8

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 7

Byte 8


BBBBBBB


IOU / IOD / AIM / PSL / PTM

BBBBBB

Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Antenna Isolation Measurement/ Status of Power Supply input Level / Status of Power Supply Temperature

PW1 / PW2 / PW3 / PW4

BBBBB

Status of Power Distribution. These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with COM alarm.

© Avitec AB

February 2005

97 (102)


Byte 1 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW1:1

PW1:2

PW1:3

PW1:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW1:5

PW1:6

PW2:1

PW2:2

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW2:3

PW2:4

PW2:5

PW2:6

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW3:1

PW3:2

PW3:3

PW3:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW3:5

PW3:6

PW3:7

PW4

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

WRD 8.5

B


Heartbeat Format in 4-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters

Field

Format

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

Message no

NNNNN

State

STATE

Date

DDMMYY

Time

HHMMSS

RCH

NNNN


CHA 1-4

XXXYYYZZZWWW

Repeated channel in chain 1-4. Channel numbers are zero padded, meaning that if channel for example is set to 7 field will be 007.

LNK 1-4

XXXYYYZZZWWW

Link channel in chain 1-4. Link channel numbers are zero padded, meaning that if channel for example is set to 16 field will be 016.

ATU 1-4

XXYYZZWW

Attenuation in uplink chain 1-4. Attenuation is zero padded, meaning that if attenuation is set to 1 field will be 01.

ATD 1-4

XXYYZZWW

Attenuation in downlink chain 1-4. Attenuation is zero padded, meaning that if attenuation is set to 0 field will be 00.

LVU 1-4

XXXYYYZZZWWW

Peak Limiting in uplink chain 1-4. Peak Limiting is zero padded, meaning that if peak limiting is set to 33, field will be 033. If output power is turned off, --- (three dashes) is replied.

LVD 1-4

XXYYZZWW

Peak Limiting in downlink chain 1. If output power is turned off, -- (two dashes) is replied.

PDL / ASU / ASD

BBBBBBBBBBBB


AMU / AMD / SZU / SZD /

BBBBBBBBB

Status of amplifier chains uplink / Downlink, Amplifier Saturation Alarm / Uplink / Downlink, Synthesizer Alarm Uplink

© Avitec AB

Description

February 2005

98 (102)


COM

/ Downlink and Status of Communication with active devices in a compressed format. These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with COM alarm. For example, the AMU is sent as Hex ‘4’, which is extracted to 0100. However, COM alarm reports an alarm for LIMPA 2 uplink, why AMU should be extracted to 01--. Byte 1 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

AMU:1

AMU:2

AMU:3

AMU:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

AMD:1

AMD:2

AMD:3

AMD:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZU:1

SZU:2

SZU:3

SZU:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZU:5

SZU:6

SZU:7

SZU:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZD:1

SZD:2

SZD:3

SZD:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZD:5

SZD:6

SZD:7

SZD:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:1

COM:2

COM:3

COM:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:5

COM:6

COM:7

COM:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:9

0

0

0

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 7

Byte 8

Byte 9


BBBBBBB


IOU / IOD / AIM / PSL / PTM

BBBBBB

Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Antenna Isolation Measurement/ Status of Power Supply input Level / Status of Power Supply Temperature

PW1 / PW2 / PW3 / PW4

BBBBB

Status of Power Distribution. These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with COM alarm. Byte 1 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW1:1

PW1:2

PW1:3

PW1:4

Byte 2

© Avitec AB

February 2005

99 (102)


Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW1:5

PW1:6

PW2:1

PW2:2

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW2:3

PW2:4

PW2:5

PW2:6

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW3:1

PW3:2

PW3:3

PW3:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW3:5

PW3:6

PW3:7

PW4

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

WRD

8.6

B(B)

Status of VSWR downlink (optionally an extra status byte in – ER repeaters)

Heartbeat Format in 4-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters

Field

Format

Repeater ID

XX-YY-ZZZZ

Message no

NNNNN

State

STATE

Date

DDMMYY

Time

HHMMSS

RCH

NNNN


CHA 1

NNN


CHA 2

NNN


CHA 3

NNN


CHA 4

NNN


ATU 1

NN


ATU 2

NN


ATU 3

NN


ATU 4

NN


ATD 1

NN


ATD 2

NN


ATD 3

NN


ATD 4

NN


LVU 1

NN


LVU 2

NN


LVU 3

NN


LVU 4

NN


© Avitec AB

Description

February 2005

100 (102)


LVD 1

NN


LVD 2

NN


LVD 3

NN


LVD 4

NN


PDL / ASU / ASD

BBBB BBBBBBBB


AMU / AMD / SZU / SZD / COM

BBBBBBBBB

Status of amplifier chains uplink / Downlink, Synthesizer Alarm Uplink / Downlink and Status of Communication with active devices in a compressed format. These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with COM alarm. For example, the AMU is sent as Hex ‘4’, which is extracted to 0100. However, COM alarm reports an alarm for LIMPA 2 uplink, why AMU should be extracted to 01--. Byte 1 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

AMU:1

AMU:2

AMU:3

AMU:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

AMD:1

AMD:2

AMD:3

AMD:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZU:1

SZU:2

SZU:3

SZU:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZU:5

SZU:6

SZU:7

SZU:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZD:1

SZD:2

SZD:3

SZD:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

SZD:5

SZD:6

SZD:7

SZD:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:1

COM:2

COM:3

COM:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:5

COM:6

COM:7

COM:8

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

COM:9

0

0

0

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 7

Byte 8

Byte 9

© Avitec AB

February 2005

101 (102)



BBBBBBB


IOU / IOD / Always 0 / PSL / PTM

BBBBBB

Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Always 0/ Status of Power Supply input Level / Status of Power Supply Temperature

PW1 / PW2 / PW3 / PW4

BBBBBB

Status of Power Distribution. These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with COM alarm. Byte 1 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW1:1

PW1:2

PW1:3

PW1:4

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW1:5

PW1:6

PW2:1

PW2:2

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW2:3

PW2:4

PW2:5

PW2:6

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW2:7

PW3:1

PW3:2

PW3:3

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW3:4

PW3:5

PW3:6

PW3:7

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

PW3:8

PW4

0

0

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 6

WRD

B


FRX/FTX

BB

Status Fiber Optic Receiver/Transmitter

© Avitec AB

February 2005

102 (102)

117873709 GSM EDGE Repeater Manual Rev G (1)

Recommend Documents